Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
HX750/HX950
RMT-D245P/D246P/D247P
UK Model
RDR-GX350/HX750
Ver. 1.3 2007.11 Russian Model
RDR-GX350/HX750/HX950
Revised-2
Photo: RDR-HX750
RMT-D247P
SPECIFICATIONS
System Inputs and outputs USB:
Laser: Semiconductor laser LINE 2 OUT RDR-HX750/HX950:
Channel coverage: (AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms USB jack Type A (For connecting
PAL/SECAM (B/G, D/K, I, L) (VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p digital still camera, Memory card
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10, (S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, reader and USB memory)
Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL) USB jack Type B (For connecting
Africa 4 to 11, 13 LINE 2 IN PictBridge-compatible printers)
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to (AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than General
B69, F21 to F69 22 kilohms Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France (VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p 50/60 Hz
B to Q (S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, Power consumption:
HYPER: S21 to S41 C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL) RDR-GX350: 22 W
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin RDR-HX650: 40 W
The above channel coverage merely ensures CVBS OUT RDR-HX750/HX950: 44 W
the channel reception within these ranges. It Dimensions (approx.):
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)
does not guarantee the ability to receive
LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin 430 × 66.5 × 286 mm (width/height/
signals in all circumstances. For details, see
“Receivable channels”. CVBS IN/OUT depth) incl. projecting parts
S-Video/RGB IN Hard disk drive capacity:
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer Decoder RDR-HX650/HX750: 160 GB
system DV IN: RDR-HX950: 250 GB
Audio reception: Split carrier system RDR-HX750/HX950: Mass (approx.):
4-pin/i.LINK S100 RDR-GX350 : 3.6 kg
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/ RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950: 4.4 kg
socket
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms Operating temperature: 5°C to 35°C
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Operating humidity: 25% to 80%
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR): Supplied accessories:
Power back-up duration: 1 hour
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, Mains lead (1)
Video recording format: MPEG-2, Aerial cable (1)
MPEG-1 PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p
Remote commander (remote) (1)
Audio recording format/applicable G-LINK:
RDR-HX750: AEP, UK/HX950: AEP, UK:
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch RDR-HX750/HX950: Set top box controller (1)
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and mini jack R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
SEP mode), PCM HDMI OUT: HDMI 19-pin-Standard
Specifications and design are subject to
Connector
change without notice.
DVD RECORDER
WARNING!! Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE
OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
and bridges. recommend their replacement.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point during repairing.
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
—2—
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE Erasing and Editing a Chapter ············································· 1-18
1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY Creating and Editing a Playlist ············································ 1-18
CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION) ············ 5 Dubbing (HDD y DVD) ······················································ 1-19
2. BOARD CONNECTION, SERVICE REMOTE Before Dubbing ··································································· 1-19
CONTROLLER ·································································· 5 HDD/DVD Dubbing ···························································· 1-19
3. MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE Dubbing Using Dubbing List ·············································· 1-19
IS REPLACED ··································································· 6 Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup) ······························· 1-20
4. HOW TO DIAGNOSE HDD FAILURE ···························· 7 DV Camcorder Dubbing ·························································· 1-20
4-1. Defective HDD ··································································· 7 Before DV Camcorder Dubbing ·········································· 1-20
4-2. HDD Recognition status ····················································· 7 Dubbing an Entire DV Format Tape
4-3. Display [E01] on FLD with unrecognized HDD ················ 8 (DV One Touch Dubbing) ················································ 1-21
4-4. Display [E02] on FLD ························································ 9 Dubbing Selected Scenes (Manual Dubbing) ······················ 1-21
4-5. When playing a video, MP3, or JPG, the contents freeze ·· 9 Playing from a DV Camcorder ············································ 1-21
4-6. Factory Check ··································································· 10 Audio Tracks ··········································································· 1-21
4-7. Final Check ······································································· 10 Playing Audio Tracks from CD/DVD ································· 1-21
5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Searching for an Audio Track ·············································· 1-22
Revised-2 ·········································································· 12 About Jukebox ····································································· 1-22
Preparing for Using Jukebox ··············································· 1-22
1. GENERAL Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox/USB Device ············ 1-23
WARNING ············································································ 1-1 Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox ·················· 1-23
Precautions ············································································· 1-1 JPEG Image Files ···································································· 1-24
Quick Guide to Disc Types ···················································· 1-1 About the “Photo Album” Function ···································· 1-24
Hookups and Settings ································································ 1-2 Preparing for Using the “Photo Album” Function ··············· 1-24
Hooking Up the Recorder ······················································ 1-2 Using the “Photo Album” List ············································· 1-25
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Control- Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD ··························· 1-25
ler ······················································································· 1-2 Printing JPEG Image Files ·················································· 1-26
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord ················· 1-3 Settings and Adjustments ························································ 1-26
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord ················· 1-4 Disc Settings (Disc Setup) ··················································· 1-26
Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead ······································· 1-4 Recording Settings (Basic) ·················································· 1-26
Step 5: Preparing the Remote ················································ 1-4 Aerial Reception Settings (Tuner) ······································· 1-27
Step 6: Easy Setup ································································· 1-5 Video Settings (Video In/Out) ············································· 1-28
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device ··································· 1-6 Audio Input Settings (Audio In) ·········································· 1-28
Connecting an External Decoder ··········································· 1-6 Audio Output Settings (Audio Out) ····································· 1-28
Eight Basic Operations Language Settings (Language) ············································ 1-29
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder ······················· 1-7 Recording Settings (Recording) ·········································· 1-29
1. Inserting a Disc ·································································· 1-7 Playback Settings (Playback) ·············································· 1-30
2. Recording a Programme ···················································· 1-7 HDMI Settings (HDMI Output) ·········································· 1-30
3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List) ··················· 1-7 Other Settings (Options) ······················································ 1-31
4. Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information ·········· 1-8 Additional Information ···························································· 1-31
5. Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme ················ 1-8 Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-31
6. Labelling and Protecting a Disc ········································· 1-9 Resetting the Recorder ························································· 1-33
7. Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment (Finalise) ····· 1-9 Notes About This Recorder ················································· 1-33
8. Reformatting a Disc ························································· 1-10 Specifications ······································································· 1-34
Guide Plus+ ············································································· 1-10 Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files, and DivX
Introduction to the GUIDE Plus+ System ··························· 1-10 Video Files ······································································· 1-34
Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus+ System ··················· 1-10 About i.LINK ······································································· 1-34
Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+ Guide to Parts and Controls ················································· 1-35
System ·············································································· 1-11 Language Code List ····························································· 1-36
Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information Country/Area Code ······························································ 1-36
(My TV) ··········································································· 1-11
Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus+ System ···················· 1-11 2. DISASSEMBLY
Timer Recording ······································································ 1-12 2-1. UPPER CASE ································································· 2-2
Before Recording ································································· 1-12 2-2. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY ·········································· 2-2
Timer Recording (GUIDE Plus+/Manual) ·························· 1-12 2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION ············································· 2-3
Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings ·················· 1-13 2-4 FR-274 BOARD, FL-178 BOARD ································· 2-3
Recording from Connected Equipment ······························· 1-14 2-5. DVD DRIVE ··································································· 2-4
Playback ·················································································· 1-14 2-6. DC FAN ··········································································· 2-4
Playing the Recorded Programme/DVD ····························· 1-14 2-7. HARD DISK (Except GX350) ········································ 2-5
Pausing a TV Broadcast (TV Pause/Pause Live TV) ·········· 1-16 2-8. AV-114/118 BOARD ······················································· 2-5
Playing from the Beginning of the Programme You Are 2-9. VDC-001 BOARD (Type AS, BS only) ·························· 2-6
Recording (Chase Play) ··················································· 1-16 2-10. POWER SUPPLY BLOCK ············································· 2-6
Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another 2-11. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ··································· 2-7
(Simultaneous Rec and Play) ··········································· 1-16
Searching for a Time/Title/Chapter/Track, etc ···················· 1-16 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Erasing and Editing ································································· 1-17 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM ···································· 3-1
Before Editing ······································································ 1-17 3-2. AV-114/118 BLOCK DIAGRAM ··································· 3-3
Erasing and Editing a Title ·················································· 1-17 3-3. RD-065 BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········································· 3-5
—3—
3-4. FR-274, FL-178, VDC-001 BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········· 3-7 5-2. AV ENCODER/DECODER IC
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM ········································ 3-9 (IC1001:MC10050F1-105/505-LU1-A
(RD-65 BOARD)) ··························································· 5-3
4. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 6. SERVICE MODE
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ································ 4-1 6-1. SERVICE MODE MAP ····················································· 2
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-3 6-2. Diagnostic Mode ································································ 3
WAVEFORMS ································································ 4-4 6-2-1. Model Setting ····································································· 3
• AV-114/118 (1/5) (IT CONTROLLER, IR) 6-2-2. Service Mode ······································································ 4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-5 6-2-3. Version Information and Other Information (First screen) 4
• AV-114 (2/5) (POWER/FAN CONT.) 6-2-4. RF Level Simplified Diagnosis (Subscreen1) ···················· 5
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-7 6-2-5. HDD Information for the HDD return sheet
• AV-118 (2/5) (POWER/FAN CONT.) (Simplified measurement mode) ········································ 6
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9 6-2-6. Cautions for handling the HDD ·········································· 7
• AV-114/118 (3/5) (VIDEO/AUDIO) 6-2-7. HDD Error Logging ··························································· 9
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11 6-2-8. ATA/ATAPI History - ERR ············································· 10
• AV-114/118 (4/5) (EURO) 6-2-9. How to confirm HDD Access Flow ·································· 10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 6-2-10. ATA/ATAPI Debugging Screen Second Screen and LD
• AV-114/118 (5/5) (TUNER) Deterioration Judgment (for writer) ······························· 11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15 6-2-11. History of VR Recording-related Errors ························ 13
• VDC-001 (VIDEO ENCODER) 6-2-12. DV Service Mode ·························································· 17
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17 6-2-13. EPG Service Mode ························································· 19
• FR-274 (FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW) 6-2-14. Aging Mode ··································································· 21
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19 6-2-15. HDD Check Mode ························································· 22
• FL-178 (DV, USB, REMOCON RECEIVER, 6-3. Setup Related Menu ························································· 23
POWER SW) 6-3-1. Firmware Downloading ···················································· 23
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21 6-3-2. Area-Specific Channel Setting ········································· 23
• RD-065 (1/7) (POWER BLOCK) 6-3-3. OSD Filter Setting ···························································· 24
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23
• RD-065 (2/7) (EMMA BLOCK) 7. ADJUSTMENTS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25 7-1. Video System Adjustment ··············································· 7-1
• RD-065 (3/7) (VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27 8. REPAIR PARTS LIST
• RD-065 (4/7) (MEMORY BLOCK) 8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-29 8-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 8-1
• RD-065 (5/7) (SATA/IDE IF) 8-1-2. CHASSIS SECTION ······················································· 8-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-31 8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 8-3
• RD-065 (6/7) (HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-33
• RD-065 (7/7) (DVD DRIVE)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-35
• SWITCHING REGULATOR (SRV-2058EK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-37
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ····································· 4-39
• VDC-001 (VIDEO ENCODER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-39
• FR-274 (FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-41
• AV-114 (IT CONTROLLER, IR, POWER/FAN CONT.,
VIDEO/AUDIO, EURO, TUNER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-43
• AV-118 (IT CONTROLLER, IR, POWER/FAN CONT.,
VIDEO/AUDIO, EURO, TUNER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-47
• RD-065 (POWER BLOCK, EMMA BLOCK, VIDEO/
AUDIO BLOCK, MEMORY BLOCK, SATA/IDE IF,
HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK, DVD DRIVE)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-51
• FL-178 (DV, USB, REMOCON RECEIVER,
POWER SW)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-55
—4—
SERVICE NOTE
Hole
3. Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) can be damaged. (There can be a case that initialization is also impossible.)
Extension cable
(J-6090-201-A)
—5—
3. MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE IS REPLACED
Required equipment:
• Remote controller (RMT-D245P/D246P/D247P)
• Service remote controller (J-6090-203-A)
• Monitor
> ?
Table1 Correspondence table between tentative model name and final product name
Tentative model name
Model name
AEP1 AEP2 AEP3 UK
RDR-GX350 MRX-1600/EC1 MRX-1600/EC2 — MRX-1600/CEK
RDR-HX650 MRX-1620/EC1 MRX-1620/EC2 MRX-1620/EC1 —
RDR-HX750 MRX-1635/EC1 MRX-1630/EC2 — MRX-1635/CEK
RDR-HX950 MRX-1655/EC1 MRX-1650/EC2 — —
—6—
4. HOW TO DIAGNOSE HDD FAILURE
—7—
4-3. Display [E01] on FLD with unrecognized HDD
E01
NO
Is the HDD free from
abnormal noises?
YES
NO
Is not “#” displayed? Unauthorized HDD Replace the HDD * Refer to “Note”.
YES
YES
Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD
There may be a problem with the Engine. return sheet before replacing the Engine.
For information about replacing the Engine,
Therefore, put the original HDD back in the unit. see page 2-4 of Chapter 2, “DISASSEMBLY”.
Then, follow the procedure to replace the Engine.
After replacing the Engine, perform “Setting the Model Name” When performing “Factory Check”, the data
on “Service Note”, page 6. saved to the HDD by the customer is erased.
Obtain customer consent before performing
“Factory Check”.
Note: Performing “Final Check” will not erase the HDD data.
YES
Another defect
has occurred.
—8—
4-4. Display [E02] on FLD
YES
Factory check
Final check Note: Performing “Final Check” will not erase the HDD data.
YES
END
YES
NO
Does the history show
no errors?
YES
—9—
4-6. Factory Check
1. Pull out and then reconnect the AC cable.
2. Press “ESC” key followed by “P.RUN” key to start Formatting.
3. When “B COMPLETE” appears, the Factory Check is complete.
4. Press “Power” button. The unit starts normally.
When “Factory Check” has finished completely without error, reset “Recording Error History” and “ATA/ATAPI History Error” with the
Clear key.
Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD return sheet before
Recording Error History Display
replacing the HDD.
Note the information on pages 6-6, 6-7, 6-9, and 6-10 of Chapter 6,
07-03-19 12:36:06 ESFSYS INIT
“SERVICE MODE”.
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Zero MR
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Initialze
When performing “Factory Check”, the data saved to the HDD by the
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Zero MR
customer is erased.
07-03-19 12:27:27 Status NG
Obtain customer consent before performing “Factory Check”.
Execute Self-Test.
• Press “3” key on the remote control unit for servicing while the menu screen is displayed.
• When the following screen is displayed, press “1” key to start the Self-Test.
Note: “2. Exe Ext Self Test” is not used. Note: Performing “Self Test” will not erase the HDD data.
Diagnosis results
• Without an error: “. . . Completed” is displayed.
Then, proceed to the Extended Self-Test.
• With an error: “. . . Error” is displayed. Look at the number in Test Result.
If the place value for tens is 1 or 2, execute the Self-Test again.
If it is from 3 to 7, the HDD must be replaced.
Note: If the result of the second test is the same, replacement of the HDD is required.
— 10 —
4-7-2. Performance Check
When “Performance Check” finishes completely without error, reset “ATA/ATAPI History Error” with the Clear key.
FL display specification
HDD factory Check HDD performance Check
aNormal display aError display aNormal display aError display
2:Random Write/Read/Compare Test 2 0 000000 82:all Sequential Read Verify Test 8 2 * * *H * *M* *S
HDD ERR 02 HDD ERR 82
3:ID Sequential Read Verify Test 3 * * *H * *M* *S 83:Power OFF Test 83 0 00000
HDD ERR 03 Power off H M S
15s Power On
7 0 000000
20s HDD ERR 07 7:Power ON Test
Power off 8 0 000000 8:Power OFF Test
9:Power ON Test
15s Power On a:Power OFF Test
9 0 000000 b:Complete
20s HDD ERR 09
Power off A 0 000000
15s
B COMPLETE
* The logo for “Factory Check” and “Performance Check” is recorded in “ATA/ATAPI History Error”.
— 11 —
5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2
• When repairing or replacing parts, check for the correct combinations by referring to the table shown below.
1) Check for the correct combination in accordance with the MAIN IC (IC1001) mounted on the RD-065 board.
Check of Destination
CN4501
IC1001
IC1221
JA5701
— 12 —
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
This section is extracted from instruction manual. SECTION 1
(RDR-HX750/HX950 : 2-899-893-E1 (1)) GENERAL
2 ,continued 3
Format in VR mode
(page 31)*1 Playable only on DVD-R
VR Formatting is in VR mode compatible
DVD-R -RVR
mode performed in the players (finalisation
“Format” setup necessary) (page 40)
(page 42).
4 ,continued 9
1-1
Usable disc versions (as of April 2007)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs Playable discs
• 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1,
Ver.1.2 with CPRM*2)
Icon used in
• 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs Type Disc Logo Characteristics
this manual
• 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0,
Ver.2.1 with CPRM*2)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double Discs such as movies that can be
purchased or rented
Layer) discs
DVD VIDEO DVD This recorder also recognises DVD-
• 8x-speed or slower DVD-R DL (Dual RAMs* as DVD Video compatible
Layer) discs (Ver.3.0 with CPRM*2) discs.
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R
DL,” “DVD-R,” and “DVD-R DL” are trademarks. VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
VIDEO CD VCD VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format
*1
When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into
this recorder, it is automatically formatted in
Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
mode, format in the “Format” setup (page 42). CD CD
*2
music CD format
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable
Media) is a coding technology that protects
copyrights for images. DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs containing MP3
audio tracks or DivX video files
Discs that cannot be recorded on DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs*/
DATA DVD — DATA DVD
• DVD-RAMs DVD-ROMs containing MP3 audio
tracks, JPEG image files or DivX video
files
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs
DATA CD — DATA CD containing either MP3 audio tracks,
JPEG image files or DivX video files
10 ,continued 11
12 ,continued 13
1-2
A: Connecting a set top box receiver B: Connecting the aerial cable only (no set top box receiver)
With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver. Use this hookup if you watch cable programme position without a set top box receiver. Also
To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the use this hookup if you are connecting only an aerial antenna.
aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver. With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position
on the recorder.
Wall
ANT IN
TO TV
to AERIAL IN
to AERIAL IN
DVD recorder
to G-LINK
to AERIAL OUT
TV
to aerial input
to aerial input
: Signal flow
*1 If your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack, connect the aerial cable to the recorder’s
AERIAL IN jack.
*2
Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector.
14 15
1-3
About the SMARTLINK About the HDMI Control Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord
features (for SCART functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre
connections only) Sync (for HDMI connections Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,
only) projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to listen
If the connected TV (or other connected to sound.
VIDEO
B
*1 “MEGALOGIC” is a registered trademark of
(white) (yellow)
Grundig Corporation.
*2 “EASYLINK” and “CINEMALINK” are L
trademarks of Philips Corporation.
*3 (red) (white) AUDIO
“Q-Link” and “NexTView Link” are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation. Audio/video cord
R
*4 “EURO VIEW LINK” is a trademark of Toshiba (not supplied)
(yellow)* (red)
Corporation.
*5 TV, projector, or
“T-V LINK” is a trademark of JVC Corporation.
audio component
: Signal flow
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 16).
A Digital audio input jack If you connect a Sony audio component that
If your audio component has a Dolby*1 is compatible with the HDMI control
Digital, DTS*2, or MPEG audio decoder and function, refer to the operating instructions
a digital input jack, use this connection. You supplied with the audio component.
can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS
(5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround
effects.
18 ,continued 19
20 ,continued 21
1-4
Code numbers of controllable TVs Auto Channel Setting
If more than one code number is listed, If you have a Sony DVD player Step 6: Easy Setup If you connect a TV to this recorder not
try entering them one at a time until you or more than one Sony DVD using SMARTLINK, select “Auto
find the one that works with your TV. Scan.” Then select your country/region
recorder Make the basic adjustments by following the using </,, and press ENTER. The
Manufacturer Code number on-screen instructions in “Easy Setup.” programme position order will be set
If the supplied remote interferes with your Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit
Sony 01 (default) according to the country/region you
22 ,continued 23
Progressive 2 Select “Postal Code,” and press 11 Select “YES” using M/m, and press To fix the set top box controller to your set
When you connect a progressive format ENTER. ENTER. top box receiver
TV to this recorder using the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, 3 Enter your postal code using </M/m/
The display asks for confirmation.
If the Video Window does not switch to
Once you have confirmed that the set top box
controller controls your set top box receiver,
select “Compatible.” ,, and press ENTER. the specified programme position, select fix it in place.
HDD caution messages If “Country” is set to “Others,” you “NO” and press ENTER until the Video
cannot enter a postal code and the 1 Remove the backing on the double-sided
Window switches to the specified
z Hint
5 Press ENTER to select “Continue.” TV programme listings.
If you want to run “Easy Setup” again, select “Easy 6 Select the set top box receiver type
b Note
Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in using M/m, and press ENTER. You cannot set tuner system or “OSD
the System Menu (page 110).
7 Select the provider using M/m, and Language” to a country/region or language
that is not supported by the GUIDE Plus+
press ENTER. system.
Setting up your set top box
receiver for the GUIDE Plus+®
8 Select the receiver brand using M/m, To change the basic GUIDE Plus+ settings
and press ENTER.
system If you cannot get the recorder to control 1 Press GUIDE.
If you select “Other providers,” you can
select a receiver brand from a list of all your set top box receiver The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Follow the steps below to set up your set top available brands. Check the connection and position of the set Screen” appears.
box receiver for the GUIDE Plus+ system. top box controller (page 14).
If your receiver brand is not on the list, 2 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar using M/
Note that the OSD language, Clock and If your set top box receiver still does not
select “???.” ,, and press ENTER.
Country are all set for the GUIDE Plus+ The receiver brand list is automatically operate with this recorder, refer to the The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.
system when “Easy Setup” is completed. updated, so your receiver may be instructions supplied with your set top box
available at a later date. Select your brand receiver and contact your cable or satellite 3 Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and
1 Press GUIDE. when it becomes available. Until then, company to see if they can provide you with press ENTER.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Basic Setup” use “???.” a compatible set top box receiver. 4 Repeat from step 2 of “Setting up your
appears. set top box receiver for the GUIDE
9 Select the connection you used for b Notes Plus+® system” on page 24.
your set top box receiver using M/m, • The list of external receivers controllable by the
GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and is
and press ENTER.
distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data
When the set top box receiver is signals. Since the time your recorder has been
connected to the recorder using hookup produced and the time you installed your recorder
A with both an aerial cable and a SCART for the first time, new external receiver codes
cord, select either “Line1” or “Antenna.” might have been added.
The display asks for confirmation. • If the external receiver is still not on the list or is
not controlled properly by the recorder, please
10 Press ENTER to select “Continue.” call Customer Support to report the brand and
The Video Window switches to the model of your external receiver.
specified programme position.
24 25
1-5
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel
After disconnecting the recorder’s mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder. equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord.
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack) OUTPUT VCR, etc.
(page 84).
DVD recorder
DVD recorder : Signal flow
z Hint
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to only the L(MONO) and VIDEO
b Notes
input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack.
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.
• If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.
b Notes
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.
DVD recorder VCR TV
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other
Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).
video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV. • Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.
Line input 1
Line input 2
• The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder’s LINE 1/
DECODER jack.
• When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the
TV/DVD button on the remote.
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected
VCR.
26 27
28 ,continued 29
1-6
12 Select your country/region, and press
ENTER. Eight Basic Operations
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
2. Recording a
Programme position
Programme
1. Inserting a Disc +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
HDD
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVR -RVideo
-RVideo DVD VCD CD DATA DVD
This section introduces the basic operation to
DATA CD
record a current TV programme to the hard
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select b Notes 4-Title List (Example: HDD)
the recording mode. • To turn off the TV Direct Rec. function, set
“SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through” in the 3. Playing the Recorded
Each time you press the button, the
display on the TV screen changes as
“Options” setup (page 128).
• If you press the [/1 button while recording, the
Programme (Title List)
follows: recorder stops recording and turns off.
• After pressing the z REC button, it may take a HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
short while to start recording. -RVR -RVideo
• You cannot change the recording mode while
* Available when “Manual Rec. Mode” is set recording. To play a recorded title, select the title from
• If there is a power failure, the programme you are the Title List.
32 ,continued 33
1-7
E Title information: 3 Select “Original” or “Play List” using M/ 4 Select “Set Thumbnail” using M/m, and
Displays the title number, title thumbnail m, and press ENTER. press ENTER. 4. Displaying the Playing
picture (playback picture for the selected The display for setting the thumbnail
title, still images for the other titles), To change the title order for HDD (Sort point appears and the title starts to play. Time and Play
recording date, recorded station name (or Titles) 5
programme position number), recording 1 Press < while the Title List is
While watching the playback picture,
press H, X or c m/M C
Information
mode, title name, and title size. displayed. to select the scene you want to set for a
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
thumbnail picture, and press X.
“Recording”: Indicates that the title is 2 Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press
Playback pauses.
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD CD
ENTER.
34 ,continued 35
N Multi-angles indicator (page 60) 3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER. CLEAR (or select “Clear,” and press
ENTER).
O Copy-protected indicator (page 79) To insert a character, move the cursor to
the right of the point where you want to
P Data transfer bar and rate insert the character. Then select the
character, and press ENTER.
To erase all of the characters, press and
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.
36 ,continued 37
1-8
9 Press x (or select “OK,” and press 4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER. 4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
ENTER). 6. Labelling and
To cancel the setting, press
O RETURN. Protecting a Disc
You can execute options effective for the
To use the number buttons entire disc in the “Disc Setup” setup.
You can also use the number buttons to enter
characters. Refer to the number next to each
Labelling a disc
Protecting a disc To cancel the protection
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR Select “Off” in step 6.
-RVideo -RWVR -RVR
z Hint
1 Insert a disc. 1 Insert a disc. You can set protection for individual titles
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31. (page 72).
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU. 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears. The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press 3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER. ENTER.
38 39
+R
Finalising is necessary when 6 Select “Next Screen,” and press b Note
7. Playing the Disc on -RVideo
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder.
ENTER. The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs
(Video mode) that have been finalised on another
For DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), the
Other DVD Equipment After finalising, you cannot edit or
record on the disc.
recorder starts finalising the disc. Go to
recorder.
(Finalise) step 9.
1 Insert a disc.
7 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31.
+RW
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)
Select a title menu style, and press
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
ENTER.
-RWVideo
Finalising is necessary when
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder. 4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER. Unfinalising a disc
After finalising, you cannot edit or
record on the disc. If you want to -RWVR -RWVideo
record on it again, unfinalise
For DVD-RWs (Video mode)
(page 41) or reformat the disc
(page 42). However, if you DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts unfinalising the disc.
reformat the disc, all recorded finalised to prohibit additional recording or
Unfinalising may take several minutes.
contents will be erased. editing can be unfinalised to allow further
Finalising is necessary. The disc recording or editing.
-RVR
can be played only on equipment
For DVD-RWs (VR mode)
that supports DVD-R in VR mode.
After finalising you cannot edit or 5 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER. If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW
record on the disc using this (VR mode) that has been finalised with other
recorder. DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.
40 41
1-9
4 Select “Format,” and press ENTER.
Learning the common elements
8. Reformatting a Disc GUIDE Plus+
Press GUIDE.
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo -RVR -RVideo
Introduction to the The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”
appears.
New discs are automatically formatted when
inserted. If necessary, you can manually re-
GUIDE Plus+ System
format a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R
disc to make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs or The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free
GUIDE Plus+
DVD-Rs, you can select a recording format interactive programme guide. It displays up
(VR mode or Video mode) according to your 5 Select an item, and press ENTER. to seven days of programme listings,
needs. “VR Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/DVD- including programme titles, promotions, and
Rs (VR mode or unrecorded discs) in VR broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data for
mode. the television programme listings are carried
“Video Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/ by your local broadcast host channel and are
DVD-Rs in Video mode. received through your aerial, set top box
“Format DVD+RW”: Formats receiver, or direct cable connection from the
DVD+RWs. wall.
SYSTEM
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list of
all European host channels.
A Video Window: This shows the
All contents on the disc are erased. programme you were watching when
MENU
you pressed GUIDE.
These are just a few of the ways to use the
</M/m/,, GUIDE Plus+ system. B Action Bar: When the same colour
ENTER z Hint
By reformatting, you can change the recording – Search for programmes by listing them button on the remote is pressed, the
format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD- according to category (such as Movies or Action Bar functions. The Action Bar
RWs that have been finalised. Sport) or by using the Keyword Search function differs according to the
function (page 46).
screen.
– Once you have found the programme you
are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+ C Information Box: Shows information
1 Insert a disc. system to set the timer for recording about the selected programme when
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31. (page 53). the “Home Screen” is displayed.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
– You can set the system to display your
favourite programmes according to
Contents will differ according to the
The System Menu appears. displayed screen.
conditions that you set, such as category
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press and keyword (page 47). D Menu Bar: Press the blue button
ENTER. For more information, see “Watching TV (“Home”), and press M to move the
Using the GUIDE Plus+ System” (page 45). cursor to the Menu Bar. Then select
one of the following features using </
,, and press ENTER.
“Grid”: Shows the programmes for the
current time slot and next 7 days.
“Search”: Allows you to search for
titles by category or by keyword
(page 46). The displayed category
depends upon the programme data
received by this recorder. Movies,
Sport, and Children are examples of
possible categories.
“My TV”: Sets the profile for your
favourite programmes (page 47).
“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer
settings (page 57).
42 ,continued 43
“Info”: Shows information when • Check the following if the programme To select a programme position quickly
available. guide data has not been received after
waiting for a day:
Watching TV Using the using the TV broadcast station logo
“Editor”: Allows you to edit the 1
channel lineup and channel display – “Easy Setup” (page 23) is completed. GUIDE Plus+ System Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
– The host channel is not disabled (see
(page 49). Screen” appears.
“Disabling programme positions” on
“Setup”: Allows you to change the
page 50). 2 Press the yellow button (“Channels”).
language, country/region, postal code, – The timer is not set.
input source, or host channel. If the programme guide data still cannot be
E “Home” position: When you press the received after checking the above, search GUIDE Plus+
blue button (“Home”), the cursor for the host channel at the following
website and set the host channel manually Colour
returns to the last programme position
(page 49): buttons
on the “Grid.”
www.europe.guideplus.com GUIDE
F Tiles: Shows the programme titles and • If the host channel has changed or moved,
category; green (sports), purple the programme guide data cannot be </M/m/,,
(movies), blue (children’s), teal received. In this case, follow the steps in ENTER
(others). “Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel” (page 48) to update the host PAGE – PAGE + 3 Select the TV broadcast station logo
G Broadcast station Logo: Shows the channel setting. DAY – DAY + using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.
broadcast station logo. • If the set top box receiver is connected to The display returns to “Grid” and the
the recorder using a SCART cord only, do
H Time Slot: Indicates the currently programme currently being broadcast by
selected time slot. Use </, to select
the following: 1 Press GUIDE. the selected TV station is selected.
– Turn on your set top box receiver. The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
a different time slot. – Connect the set top box controller. Screen” appears.
4 Select a programme using </,, and
– Follow the steps in “Changing the GUIDE press ENTER.
Plus+ host channel manually” (page 49)
z Hint To return to the “Home” position
to set the host channel manually. Be sure
You can also move the cursor to the Menu Bar by Press the blue button (“Home”).
pressing MENU. to set your set top box receiver (tuner) as
the source. The cursor returns to the home position on the
“Grid.”
b Notes
Troubleshooting guide • Your set top box receiver’s programme position To set a programme for timer recording
may suddenly change even if the recorder is See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+)”
If you are having trouble displaying the turned off. This is because the set top box (page 53).
television programme list, please check the controller has changed the programme position to
following: receive the GUIDE Plus+ data. To close the GUIDE Plus+ system
• Your country/region must be set correctly
(page 23).
• When you reset the recorder (page 136) the
following GUIDE Plus+ system settings are reset:
2 Select a programme using </M/m/ Press GUIDE.
– Country/region setting in “Easy Setup” ,, and press ENTER.
• The clock must be set correctly. If the clock z Hints
– “Country” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the The GUIDE Plus+ system disappears and
is not set, set it manually (page 109). • Press the PAGE +/– buttons to change the
Menu Bar the programme position changes to the
• This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus+ programme list by page.
– “Postal Code” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the selected programme.
data several times a day when the recorder • Press the DAY +/– buttons to change the
Menu Bar
is turned off (standby mode). Turn off the programme list by day.
Note that the GUIDE Plus+ system is also reset
recorder when you are not using it (for when you make changes to the host channel
example, at night). After initial setup settings.
(page 23), it may take up to 24 hours for • The GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used when
your recorder to start receiving programme “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC” in the
listings. It may take up to one day to receive “Basic” setup (page 110).
all seven days of TV programme listings.
44 ,continued 45
1-10
To unlock the Video Window 4 Select a programme using M/m, and
The Video Window is locked so that it does
not change programme positions when you
Searching for a press ENTER. Listing Up Your Favourite
move the cursor across other titles. Programme Using the Programme Information
From “Grid,” select the logo of the To enter a new keyword
programme position that is locked, and press GUIDE Plus+ System (My TV)
the red button (“Unlock”). “ ” changes to
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
“ ” and the Video Window is unlocked. To You can set a profile and list up only your
lock the Video Window, select the logo of the 2 Select “My Choice” using </,. favourite programme information.
GUIDE Plus+
programme position you want to lock and 3 Press the yellow button (“Add”).
press the red button (“Lock”). The display for entering characters
appears.
b Notes
• The Video Window is locked during recording
and the lock indicator appears in the Video Colour
buttons
Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window
Colour
while recording. buttons
• If you are watching programmes through a set top
box receiver, the Video Window may not change </M/m/,,
ENTER
as fast as you move the cursor. In this case, lock
</M/m/,,
the Video Window (page 46). ENTER
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and 4 Select a character on the keyboard using
press ENTER. </M/m/,, and press ENTER.
To switch between upper-case, lower-
case, or characters with accents, press the Setting a profile
yellow button (“Keyboard”) repeatedly.
To cancel entering a new keyword, press 1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and
the red button (“Back”). press the yellow button (“Profile”).
5 Repeat step 4 to enter the keyword.
6 Press the green button (“Save”).
The entered keyword is registered.
To delete the keyword, select the
keyword you want to delete, and press
the red button (“Delete”).
2 Select a category using </,. To change the keyword, select the
To search for a programme by keyword, keyword you want to change, and press
select “My Choice.” You can search for the green button (“Edit”).
all programmes that contain the keyword
in the programme’s title and in the To set a programme for timer recording
programme’s Information Box. If no See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+)”
keywords are displayed, enter the (page 53).
keyword. See “To enter a new keyword”
below. z Hint
When two or more keywords are set for “My
3 Select a sub-category using M/m, and Choice,” you can select “All” for sub-category.
press ENTER.
Programmes that meet the conditions are
listed.
The sub-categories differ according to
country/region.
46 ,continued 47
2 Select “Channels,” “Categories,” or 5 Wait for one day until the programme 9 Select “Confirm” using </,, and
“Keywords,” and press the yellow Making Changes to the guide data can be received. press ENTER.
button (“Add”). If the programme guide data has not been The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+
“Channels”: Select the programme GUIDE Plus+ System received after waiting for a day, search setup menu.
position using </M/m/,, and press
ENTER. To add more programme
for the host channel at the following
website and set the host channel
10 Wait one day until the programme
manually (“Changing the GUIDE Plus+ guide data can be received.
positions, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 16 [/1 host channel manually” (page 49)).
programme positions. www.europe.guideplus.com
To cancel the settings
GUIDE Plus+
To cancel the registration, select a Number
programme position, and press the red
buttons Press the red button (“Back”).
button (“Delete”). Colour Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host
To return to the “Home” position
“Categories”: Select the category using buttons channel manually Press the blue button (“Home”).
</M/m/,, and press ENTER. To add GUIDE
more categories, press the yellow button The cursor returns to the home position on the
If the set top box receiver is connected to the
(“Add”). You can register up to 4 “Grid.”
</M/m/,, recorder using a SCART cord only and you
categories. ENTER want to receive the programme guide data
To cancel the registration, select a
To check the GUIDE Plus+ system
from your set top box receiver, search for the
category, and press the red button host channel on the following website and set
information
(“Delete”). it for your area, following the steps below: 1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar, and
“Keywords”: Enter a keyword. See “To www.europe.guideplus.com press ENTER.
enter a new keyword” on page 47. To add
2 Select “GUIDE Plus+ system
more keywords, press the yellow button
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+
1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar. Information” using M/m, and press
(“Add”). You can register up to 16 The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears. ENTER.
keywords. host channel
To cancel the registration, select a 2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/
keyword, and press the red button The default host channel setting is set to m, and press ENTER.
Checking programme positions
(“Delete”). “Automatic,” so you should not have to
3 Press the yellow button (“Change”)
3 Press ENTER.
change the host channel setting. However, if
the host channel has changed or moved,
twice. Check whether programme position numbers
“Manual” appears. are the same as the programme position
update the host channel setting. numbers set in the “Tuner” setup.
If the set top box receiver is connected to the If you want to make adjustments to the
To change the profile settings recorder using a SCART cord only (page 14),
Repeat from step 1 above. channel settings or change the channel name,
see “Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host see “Aerial Reception Settings (Tuner)”
channel manually” on page 49. (page 111).
Selecting and watching a 1
programme from My TV
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar.
1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and 2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/
press ENTER. m, and press ENTER.
The programmes that match the profile 3 Press the yellow button (“Reset”).
4 Select “Source” using ,.
conditions are displayed.
4 Press [/1 to turn off the recorder.
5
2 Select a programme using </M/m/ Press the yellow button (“Source”)
,, and press ENTER. repeatedly to select the input source.
6 Select “Prog. No.” using ,.
To set a programme for timer recording 7 Enter the programme position number
See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+)” using the number buttons. 2 Press ENTER.
(page 53).
8 Press the green button (“Save”). 3 Press , to move the cursor to the
The display asks for confirmation. right column.
48 ,continued 49
1-11
4 Select the programme position you Approx. recording time
want to check using M/m. (hours)
To change the programme position, press Timer Recording Recording
HDD DVD*1
the green button (“Prog. No.”), then enter mode
a programme position number using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
Before Recording RDR-
HX750
RDR-
HX950
Timer Recording
mode)
• Adjust the recording picture quality if
LSP r 84 130 2 hr.
necessary (page 56). 30 min.
Disabling programme positions
b Note ESP r 100 155 3
If any programme positions are unused or To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment,
LP r 135 210 4
contain unwanted channels, you can hide finalise the disc (page 40).
them. EP r 200 315 6
SLP r 270 425 8
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar, and Recording mode
press ENTER. SEP*2 (Long 340 530 10
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of duration)
2 In the left column, select the video tapes, you can select the desired *1 The approximate recording time is for 12 cm
programme position you want to hide recording mode using the REC MODE DVD discs.
or display using M/m. button. The approximate recording times for DVD+R
Recording modes with higher quality provide DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)
3 Press the red button (“On/Off”). a more beautiful recording, but the large data discs are as follows:
The disabled positions will turn grey. volume also results in a shorter recording HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes
To show the disabled positions, press the time. HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes
red button (“On/Off”) again. SP: 3 hours 35 minutes
Conversely, a longer duration provides a
LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes
longer recording time, but the lower data
ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes
volume results in a coarser picture quality.
b Notes LP: 7 hours 11 minutes
• You cannot record a programme position if it is EP: 10 hours 46 minutes
not set in “Aerial Reception Settings (Tuner)”
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes
(page 111) even if it is set to “On” in the “Editor” recording modes. SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes
*2 When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP
in the Menu Bar. To select further options for recording mode
• If you are using your set top box receiver to is the longest recording time available. If you
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec.
receive programmes (when the set top box select SEP, the recording mode will
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the
receiver is connected to the recorder using a automatically revert to SLP.
“Recording” setup (page 119). To record
SCART cord only, page 14) and are able to
pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on z Hint
receive the same programme with both the set top
the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On To easily select a manual recording mode, press
box receiver and the recorder, change the
“Source” to receive the programme with the (go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and
recorder’s tuner. details about manual recording mode, see select a manual recording mode using </,.
page 119.
For timer recording, you can also select
“AUTO” as recording mode, which
maximizes the recording quality for the space
available on the disc (if recording to DVD),
or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to
HDD).
50 ,continued 51
52 ,continued 53
1-12
Rec. Mode Adjust 7 Select the input source using M/m,
If there is not enough available disc space for Setting the timer manually and select the programme position Using the Quick Timer function
the recording, the recorder automatically using the number buttons or M/m.
adjusts the recording mode to enable the You can set the recorder to record in 30-
You can also select the programme
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec. minute increments.
position using the yellow button
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording” (“Channels”).
setup (page 121). Press z REC repeatedly to set the
Number
buttons
8 Press the green button (“Next”). duration.
If the timer settings overlap The display for entering characters Each press advances the time in 30-minute
If one or more timer settings overlap, a Colour appears. increments. The maximum duration is six
message appears. To change the timer buttons To change the title name, select a hours.
settings, see “Checking/Changing/ GUIDE character on the keyboard using </M/
m/,, and press ENTER.
Timer Recording
Cancelling Timer Settings” on page 57.
</M/m/,, To switch between upper-case, lower-
z Hint ENTER case, or characters with accents, press the (normal recording)
If you are recording to the HDD, you can play the yellow button (“Keyboard”).
title as it is being recorded by selecting the The time counter decreases minute by minute
programme title on the Title List (page 68). 9 Press the green button (“Save”). to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the
The date, start and stop times, power turns off).
b Notes z REC programme position, etc. settings appear.
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full x REC The recorder is ready to start recording. To cancel the Quick Timer
appears on the screen, change the recording STOP Press z REC repeatedly until the counter
destination to “DVD,” or make available space appears in the front panel display. The
for the recording (page 72).
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer recorder returns to normal recording mode.
• If there is not enough available DVD disc space
for the recording, the recorder automatically
1 Press GUIDE. recording To stop recording, press x REC STOP.
records the programme to the HDD even if you
select “DVD” (Recovery Recording).
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar. See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
Settings” on page 57. b Note
• The last recording mode you selected manually
The SCHEDULE list appears. If you turn off the recorder during recording,
becomes the default recording mode for timer 3 Press the green button (“Manual”). To stop recording during timer recording
recording is stopped.
recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system. Press x REC STOP.
• You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
DVD) once the recording starts.
• The beginning of some recordings may not be
recorder to stop recording.
made when using the VPS/PDC function. On-screen instructions may appear after
• You cannot extend the recording duration time pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
when “VPS/PDC” is selected (page 58). the on-screen instructions.
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works
with a timer recording to DVD, and the VPS/PDC Rec. Mode Adjust
function set to off. If there is not enough available disc space for
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO” the recording, the recorder automatically
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
4 Set the date using the number buttons
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”
and </M/m/,. Then press the setup (page 121).
green button (“Next”).
5 Set the start time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
6 Set the stop time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
54 ,continued 55
To create your own setting “Black Level”: Selects the black level
Adjusting the recording picture 1 Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or
(setup level) for the NTSC video signals. Checking/Changing/
quality Select “ON” to raise the standard black
“Memory3” in step 3.
level. Select this when the picture Cancelling Timer
You can adjust the picture quality from the 2 Select “Detailed Settings,” and press appears too dark.
connected equipment, such as a TV or VCR ENTER. Select “OFF” to set the black level of the Settings
by selecting a preset setting. You can also The display for adjusting detailed input signals to the standard level.
settings appears. Normally, select this position. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
adjust the picture quality by changing
detailed settings, and store up to three settings 3 Select an item using M/m, and adjust “Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance. -RVR -RVideo
in the memory. settings using </,. “Chroma Level”: Makes the colours
deeper or lighter. You can change or cancel timer settings using
For details about each setting, see the
the SCHEDULE list.
explanation of the display. 4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
Timer Recording
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive The setting is automatically stored as the
video signal when “Component Video setting you selected in step 1.
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 115).
Select “Motion” for a picture, including Number
buttons
subjects that move dynamically. Creating chapters in a title
SYSTEM Select “Still” for a picture with little Colour
MENU movement. The recorder can automatically divide a buttons
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive recording (a title) into chapters by inserting GUIDE
</M/m/,,
ENTER video signal to match the type of DVD chapter marks. To select chapter mark
software that you are watching when intervals or disable this function, see “Auto
DISPLAY </M/m/,
“Component Video Out” is set to Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter
“Progressive” (page 115). (Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)”
Select “Auto” to detect the software type in the “Recording” setup (page 121).
(Film-based or Video-based) When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can
1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.
automatically and select the appropriate
conversion mode. Normally select this edit chapter marks (page 75).
The System Menu appears. position.
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and Select “Off” to fix the conversion mode Changing timer settings
press ENTER. to the mode for Video-based software.
56 ,continued 57
1-13
3 Select the timer setting you want to b Notes 3 Select the desired audio signal when
change using M/m, and press the • The new settings become effective when you exit
Recording from recording a bilingual programme to
the GUIDE Plus+ system.
green button (“Edit”). the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video
• When you set the recording destination to
“HDDr,” the previous timer recording will be
Connected Equipment mode).
replaced with the new one even if you have not Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and
watched it. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R “Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R”
-RVR -RVideo in the “Audio In” setup (page 116).
About the VPS/PDC function
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV You can record from a connected VCR or 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select
programmes in some broadcast systems. similar device. To connect a VCR or similar the recording mode.
These signals ensure that timer recordings are device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar For details about the recording mode, see
made regardless of any broadcast delays, Device” on page 26. Use the DV IN jack on page 51.
Timer Recording
the front panel if the equipment has a DV
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.
output jack (i.LINK jack). 5 Insert the source tape into the
To use the VPS/PDC function connected equipment and set to
4 In the left column, select an item Select “VPS / PDC” in step 7 above. playback pause.
using the red button (“Back”) or the When you turn on this function, the recorder
green button (“Next”), and adjust starts scanning the channels before the timer
HDD DVD
6 Press z REC.
recording starts. This recorder starts recording.
using the number buttons or </M/m/
,. b Note
INPUT
7 Press the pause (or play) button on the
You can change the date, start time, stop The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO” connected equipment to cancel the
time, programme position, or input when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.” playback pause status.
source. The connected equipment starts playback
The cursor moves to the right column. and the playback image is recorded by
Cancelling timer settings
5 Press the corresponding colour button this recorder.
To stop recording, press x REC STOP
repeatedly to change settings. 1 Press GUIDE. on this recorder.
• Yellow button (“Destination”): Sets the
recording destination. If there is not 2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.
enough available DVD disc space for The SCHEDULE list appears.
z REC REC MODE If you connect a digital video camera with
the recording, the recorder
automatically records the programme
3 Select the timer setting you want to x REC a DV IN jack
cancel using M/m, and press the red STOP See “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 84
to the HDD even if you select “DVD”
(Recovery Recording). When you set a button (“Delete”). for an explanation of how to record from the
DV IN jack.
daily or weekly timer, “HDDr” allows
you to replace the previous timer To close the SCHEDULE list 1 Press HDD or DVD. z Hint
recording with the new one Press GUIDE. If you select DVD, insert a recordable You can adjust the settings for the recording picture
automatically (HDD only). DVD (see “1. Inserting a Disc” on before recording. See “Adjusting the recording
• Green button (“Frequency”): Selects When the timer settings overlap page 31). picture quality” on page 56.
the recording pattern.
• Red button (“Quality”): Selects the
• The programme that starts first has priority
and the entire programme is recorded.
2 Press INPUT to select an input source b Notes
recording mode (page 51). according to the connection you • When recording a video game image, the screen
• After finishing the previous recording, the
made. may not be clear.
6 Press , to display “Timing.” other recording starts with several tens-of-
second’s delay (when the end-time of one The front panel display changes as • You cannot select “Bilingual” in step 3 if “HDD
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in
7 Press the green button (“Timing”) recording and the start-time of another are follows:
the “Recording” setup (page 122), or if you select
repeatedly to select the duration time the same). programme position PCM as recording mode.
or to set the VPS/PDC function. • When the recordings start at the same time, • You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is
See “About the VPS/PDC function” only one of them will be recorded. Cancel set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup
the timer setting for the programme that you (page 115).
below.
• If you want to record to a particular are not going to record.
HDD genre, press the yellow button b Note
(“Genre”) repeatedly. When “VPS / PDC” is set for one or more timer
recordings, the start times may change in the event
of a broadcast delay or early start.
58 59
3 Select a title using M/m, and press To display the registration code for this To lock the recorder (Child Lock)
ENTER. recorder You can lock all of the buttons on the
Playback Playback starts from the selected title. Select “Registration Code” of “DivX” in the recorder so that the settings are not cancelled
“Options” setup (page 128). by mistake.
Playing the Recorded To resume playback from the point where
When the recorder is turned off, hold down x
To use the DVD’s Menu on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in
Programme/DVD When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalised you stopped (Resume Play) the front panel display. The recorder does not
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), When you press H again after you stop work except for timer recordings while the
DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode), you can playback, the recorder resumes playback Child Lock is set.
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
display the disc’s menu by pressing TOP from the point where you pressed x.
MENU or MENU. To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the
DATA CD *
To start from the beginning, press x again, recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the
* DivX video file only b Note and press H. Playback starts from the front panel display.
The H button is not available in the disc’s menu. beginning of the title/track/scene.
One-Touch Play (for SCART/HDMI
Playback
HDD DVD To play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs with The point where you stopped playing is connections only)
PBC functions cleared when: Press H. With one touch of the H button,
Number
buttons PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play – you open the disc tray (except HDD). the recorder and your TV automatically turn
CLEAR VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs – you play another title (except HDD). on and the TV’s input is switched to the
AUDIO
ANGLE interactively using the menu on your TV recorder. Playback starts automatically.
SUBTITLE
PLAY MODE
– you switch the Title List to Original or
SYSTEM screen. Playlist (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode
MENU TITLE LIST/ When you start playing a VIDEO CD/Super only). z Hint
MENU TOP MENU You can also use the H button in step 3 (page 60)
VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the menu – you edit the title after stopping playback.
</M/m/,, appears. to start playback.
ENTER – you change the settings on the recorder.
Select an item using the number buttons, and – you make a recording (except HDD/DVD-
/
DISPLAY
press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions b Note
. >
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode). When using the HDMI connection, there may be a
in the menu (press H when “Press – you disconnect the mains lead. delay, before the playback picture appears on the
SELECT” appears). TV screen, and the beginning portion of the
H/X/x
b Notes playback picture may not be displayed.
b Note • You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.
Some playback options such as search, repeat play • Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO
or programme play cannot be played with PBC CDs.
function. To play with playback options, start
playback without PBC functions using the Title To play restricted DVDs (Parental Control)
List.
1 Press HDD or DVD. If you play a restricted DVD, the display for
• If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1. entering your password appears on your TV
To change the angles
Inserting a Disc” on page 31). screen.
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO Enter your four-digit password using the
are recorded on the disc, “ ” appears on
CD, DATA DVD or DATA CD, press number buttons, and press ENTER.
the screen. Press ANGLE during playback.
H. Playback starts. The recorder starts playback.
To switch the angle mark indicator to off, set
2 Press TITLE LIST. “Angle Indicator” to “Off” in the “Playback”
setup (page 124).
To register or change the password, see
For details about the Title List, see “3. “Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only)” on
Playing the Recorded Programme (Title page 123.
List)” on page 33.
To stop playback
Example: HDD Press x.
1-14
Buttons Operations
Playback options
Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in
To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 60. (slow, freeze frame) pause mode.
Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode.
HDD +RW -RWVR
Buttons Operations To resume normal playback, press H.
-RWVideo +R -RVR
AUDIO Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed *1
-RVideo DVD VCD
-RWVR -RVR
repeatedly in normal playback mode.
HDD *1*2 *1*2
DVD VCD DATA DVD * DVD DATA DVD * DATA CD * : Selects the language. DATA DVD DATA CD
*1
-RVR : Selects the main or sub sound. Playback direction only
DATA CD * HDD -RWVR *2
DivX video file only
* DivX video file only VCD : Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.
X (pause) Pauses playback.
SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly. To resume normal playback, press H.
DVD DATA DVD * DATA CD *
b Notes
Playback
* DivX video file only • Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles
/ (instant replay/ Each time you press , replays the scene for the following recorded on this recorder.
instant advance) duration. • JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder
5 seconds t 15 seconds t 30 seconds t 1 minute t can only be played as a slideshow. For video files
2 minutes t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t containing JPEG image files and movies, the
20 minutes t advances the time in 10-minute increments t recorder can play movie parts only.
2 hours
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound
Each time you press , briefly fast forwards the current scene track
for the following duration. DTS audio signals are output only through the
30 seconds t 1 minute t 1 minute 30 seconds t 2 minutes t DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.
3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t 20 minutes t When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set
advances the time in 10-minute increments t 2 hours “DTS Output” to “On” in the “Audio Out” setup
. (previous)/ Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scene/track (page 117).
> (next) when pressed during playback.
Goes to the beginning of the first title/track when pressed in stop
mode.
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback.
(fast reverse/fast forward) Search speed changes as follows:
fast reverse fast forward
mFR1*1 T t MFF1*2
mFR2 T T t t MFF2
mFR3*3 T T T t t t MFF3*3
mFR4*3 T T T T t t t t MFF4*3
When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse
continues at the selected speed until you release the button.
*1
When you press m once during playback, you can play Reverse
play (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/DivX video
files).
*2
When you press M once during playback, you can play quickly
with sound (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs).
*3 Not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs.
62 ,continued 63
ENTER at the starting point (point A) of “Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
programme (page 65). press ENTER. Adjusting the picture quality
the portion to be played repeatedly.
“Repeat Disc” (for VIDEO CDs*2/DVD- The “Input/Edit Programme” display
“Set point B” is selected.
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)): repeats all of differs depending upon the disc type. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo+R
4 Continue playing to locate the ending the tracks on a disc.
*1
Example: DVD -RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
point (point B), and press ENTER. DivX video file only
DATA CD *
*2 Available only when playing without PBC
A-B Repeat starts.
functions * DivX video file only
4 Press ENTER.
You can adjust the picture quality from
To cancel A-B Repeat Repeat play starts.
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off” connected equipment, such as a TV or
in the “Play Mode” menu. projector by selecting a preset setting. You
can also adjust the picture quality by
To cancel Repeat play
z Hint changing detailed settings, and store up to
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in
the System Menu.
Off” in the “Play Mode” menu. 4 Select a title or album (example: Title three settings in the memory.
001) using M/m, and press ENTER.
z Hint 1 Press SYSTEM MENU during playback
b Note 5 Select a chapter or track (example: or in pause mode.
You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the
When playing an HDD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD-R (Video mode), set the start
System Menu. Chapter 01) using M/m, and press The System Menu appears.
ENTER.
and stop points within the same title.
b Note The chapter or track is programmed.
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and
You cannot select “Repeat Programme” when no press ENTER.
If you make a mistake, select the step
programme remains.
number (example: 01.) using </M/m, 3 Select a preset setting using </,,
and press CLEAR. and press ENTER.
6 To programme other chapters or Dynamic: produces a bold dynamic
picture by increasing the picture contrast
tracks, press </M/m/, to select a
and the colour intensity.
step number, and repeat steps 4 and
Standard: displays a standard picture.
5. Professional: displays an original picture.
7 Press H. Memory1/Memory2/Memory3: Your
own settings. To create your own
Programme play starts.
settings, see “To create your own setting”
below.
64 ,continued 65
1-15
To check the detailed settings for the “MNR” (mosquito noise reduction): 2 Press H to resume watching the
selected preset, press DISPLAY. Reduces the faint noise appearing around Pausing a TV Broadcast programme.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
the outlines of the images. The noise
reduction effects are automatically (TV Pause/Pause Live TV)
You can fast forward/fast reverse, pause,
or stop the programme using m/M,
adjusted within each setting range X and x without affecting the recording.
according to the video bit rate and other
To create your own setting factors.
HDD 3 Press x REC STOP to stop recording.
1 Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or “Sharpness”: Sharpens the outlines of the You can pause a current TV broadcast, and
“Memory3” in step 3. images. record it on the HDD, then continue watching
“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of the programme at a later time. This is useful b Notes
2 Select “Detailed Settings,” and press • The picture does not pause and the recorder starts
images outlines. when you receive an unexpected phone call
ENTER. only recording in the following cases.
“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity or visitor while watching TV. – when the programme positions are preset
The display for adjusting detailed
of white. When connecting the recorder to your TV differently between the recorder and the
settings appears.
“Black Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity using the SCART jack, do the followings. connected TV.
of black. – set “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder – when watching the programme from the
Playback
“Black Level”: Selects the black level Only” in the “Options” setup (page 128). external equipment connected to your TV.
(setup level) for the video signals. – set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the • The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when
Select “ON” to raise the standard black “Options 2” setup (page 128). “TV Pause” is set to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
level. Select this when the picture – preset programme positions by “Options 2” setup (page 128).
• You may not be able to use the “TV Pause”
appears too dark. downloading from your TV using
function depending on some TVs. For details,
Select “OFF” to set the black level of the “Download from TV” of “Auto Channel refer to the operating instructions supplied with
input signals to the standard level. Setting” in the “Tuner” setup (page 111). your TV.
Normally, select this position. If you do not make the SCART connection,
3 Select an item using M/m, and adjust
“Gamma Correction”: Adjusts how dark set “TV Pause” to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
• The “TV Pause” function will not work correctly
when watching TV via the connected component
settings using </,.
areas look. “Options 2” setup (page 128). such as a VCR or digital tuner. The “TV Pause”
For details about each setting, see the function works only with the channel selected on
“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance.
explanation of the display. the TV.
“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive • You cannot use the “TV Pause” function as a
deeper or lighter.
video signal when “Component Video recording feature from the component (VCR,
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 115). 4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit. etc.) connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack.
Select “Motion” for a picture, including The setting is automatically stored as the • The “TV Pause” function will not work if the
subjects that move dynamically. setting you selected in step 1. connected TV does not comply with
Select “Still” for a picture with little SMARTLINK. To check whether your TV
movement. b Notes complies with SMARTLINK, refer to the
• If the outlines of the images on your screen operating instructions supplied with your TV.
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive
become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to
video signal to match the type of DVD
“Off.”
software that you are watching when • Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
“Component Video Out” is set to the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to
“Progressive” (page 115). discern. Also, these functions may not work with
Select “Auto1” to automatically detect some screen sizes. m M
the software type (Film-based or Video- • The following settings are not available for the TV PAUSE H/X/x
based) and select the appropriate signals output from the HDMI jack. x REC
conversion mode. Normally select this – “Sharpness” STOP
position. – “White Enhancer”
– “Black Enhancer”
If the picture appears unnatural, select
– “Black Level”
“Auto2,” “On,” or “Off.” – “Gamma Correction”
“YNR” (luminance noise reduction):
Reduces noise contained in the
– “Hue” 1 While viewing a TV broadcast, press
– “Chroma Level” TV PAUSE.
luminance element of the video signal.
The picture pauses, and the recorder
“BNR” (block noise reduction): Reduces
starts recording the current TV channel
“block noise” or mosaic-like patterns in
to the HDD.
the picture.
It may take up to 10 seconds to start
recording.
66 67
HDD DVD
Press H while recording.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
programme you are recording. 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
When you fast forward to the point that you The “Play Mode” menu appears.
are recording, “Chase Play” returns to normal
playback.
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press
TITLE LIST ENTER.
68 ,continued 69
1-16
The display for entering the number
appears.
Example: Chapter Search Erasing and Editing
Before Editing
This recorder offers various edit options for
various disc types.
b Notes
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove
the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.
4 Press the number buttons to select the • DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot
number of the title, chapter, time be edited on this recorder.
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s
code, etc., you want.
control information is full, erase or edit
For example: Time Search unnecessary titles.
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, • The remaining disc space displayed on the screen
and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”
70 ,continued 71
To open up disc space • “A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the 4 Select a title, and press ENTER.
To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or
DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with
Erasing and Editing a title (page 73).
• “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles
A check mark appears in the check box.
To clear the check mark, press ENTER
the largest number in the title list. Title (page 74). again.
• “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters in a title
Largest title number
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R (page 75). 5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles
• “Set Genre”: Assigns a genre to a title. you want to edit.
-RVR -RVideo
72 ,continued 73
1-17
3 Select point A using m/M, and 5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
press X. Dividing a title (Divide) Erasing and Editing a You can make the following edits to the
• To return to the beginning of the title, chapter.
press X and then press .. HDD -RWVR * -RVR *
Chapter “Divide”: Divides a chapter into two
(page 75).
4 Select “From,” and press ENTER. If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do
not want to reduce the picture quality, divide HDD -RWVR -RVR “Erase/Move”
The position of point A is displayed, and • “Erase”: Erases the selected chapter
the title re-starts playing. the title into two shorter titles. Note that
You can edit individual chapters within a (page 76).
dividing a title cannot be undone.
5 Select point B using m/M, and * Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD-RWs/
title. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)
without changing the original recordings,
• “Move” (for Playlist titles on DVD-
press X. DVD-Rs in VR mode. RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode): Changes
create a Playlist (page 76). the chapter’s playing order (page 77).
6 Select “To,” and press ENTER. 1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a “Combine”: Combines two chapters into
The position of point B is displayed. Title,” select “Edit,” and press one (page 76).
7 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER. ENTER.
The scene is erased. 2 Select “Divide,” and press ENTER. Dividing a chapter (Divide)
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and
To cancel “A-B Erase”
press ENTER. For details, see page 72. 1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
74 ,continued 75
Erasing a chapter (Erase) Creating and Editing a Moving a Playlist title (Move) Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a Playlist 1 Press TITLE LIST. You can divide a Playlist title. For
Chapter,” select “Erase/Move.” Switch to the Playlist (page 72). instructions, see page 74.
-RWVR -RVR
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit The sub-menu appears. Moving a chapter (Move)
without changing the actual recordings. You
can create up to 99 Playlist titles.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
1 Press TITLE LIST.
4 Select “Move,” and press ENTER. Switch to the Playlist (page 72).
b Note
Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the 2 Select a Playlist title containing the
“Copy-Once” copy protection signal cannot be chapter you want to edit, and press
dubbed or moved (page 79). ,.
2 Select a chapter using </,, and The sub-menu appears.
press ENTER. 3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
3 4
Erasing and Editing
Select “Erase,” and press ENTER. Select “Chapter Edit,” and press
The display asks for confirmation. ENTER.
4 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER. 5 Select a new location for the title
5 Select “Erase/Move.”
The chapter is erased. using M/m, and press ENTER.
TITLE LIST The title moves to the new location.
• To move more titles, repeat from step 2.
</M/m/,,
Combining multiple chapters ENTER
(Combine) Combining multiple Playlist
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a titles (Combine)
Chapter,” select “Combine.”
1 Press TITLE LIST.
1 Press TITLE LIST. Switch to the Playlist (page 72).
6 Select a chapter using </,, and
Switch to the Playlist (page 72). 2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
press ENTER.
2 Press ,. The sub-menu appears.
7 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears. 3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
3 Select “Create,” and press ENTER. 4 Select “Combine,” and press ENTER.
8 Select a new location for the chapter
The original titles in the Title List appear. using </,, and press ENTER.
The chapter moves to the new location.
4 Select an original title to add to the
2 Move the combining bar using </ Playlist, and press ENTER.
,, and press ENTER. The selected title is added to the Playlist.
The two adjacent chapters of the 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of
combining bar are combined. the titles you want to add to the
Playlist.
76 77
1-18
• The chapter marks in the dubbing source Dubbing restriction
+RW +R
(Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD+R at protection signals can be moved only from You can dub a single title by pressing the
HDD -RWVR -RWVideo
normal speed. The chapter marks are the HDD to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR HDD/DVD DUB button during playback.
-RVR -RVideo
automatically inserted according to the mode)* (after the title is moved, the original
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying “Auto Chapter (Video)” and “Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)” settings in the
title in the HDD is erased). The “Move”
function is performed using Dubbing List.
1 Start playback of a title.
a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive For playing a title, see “Playing the
(HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.” You “Recording” setup (page 122). Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy Recorded Programme/DVD” on page 60.
can dub a playing title using the HDD/DVD • The “Set Thumbnail” setting in the dubbing protection signals are indicated with .
DUB button (see “HDD/DVD Dubbing” on source is dubbed as a thumbnail picture
Copy Dubbing
2 Press HDD/DVD DUB.
page 79) or you can select to dub multiple marker (except when dubbing from a protection The recorder starts dubbing the current
titles all at once (see “Dubbing Using DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ signals playing title from the beginning.
Dubbing List” on page 80). You can also dub DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)). The The recorder turns off automatically
position of thumbnail picture markers may Copy-Free when you do not use the recorder for
an entire DVD disc to make a backup copy
(see “Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup)” be slightly changed from the original. (No copy
protection HDD
, -RW
,
+RW
Video
-RWVR
+R
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
on page 83). signal) has finished.
z Hint -RVR -RVideo
Before you start, read the following
78 79
D Total size of the selected titles and 10 Select “Start Dubbing,” and press Required times for High-speed Dubbing from
Dubbing Using Dubbing available space on the disc to be ENTER. HDD to DVD (for 60-minute programme)*1
dubbed (approximate) When you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step Speed*2 6x 2.4x 2x
List E Selected title’s thumbnail picture
9, select the title menu style, and press
ENTER. High-speed
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R 5 Select a title, and press ENTER. The recorder turns off automatically Rec.
DVD+RW/ DVD+R
DVD-RW/ (Double
DVD-R
(Dual
-RVR -RVideo The selected title changes colour. when you do not use the recorder for mode
DVD+R/ Layer) Layer)
When you select “HDD -> DVD” in step more than 20 minutes after the dubbing DVD-R
You can select the titles you want to dub 3, you can change the title order or search has finished.
using Dubbing List. You can also edit titles HQ Approx. Approx. Approx.
for a title by genre (see “3. Playing the
before dubbing without changing the original 10 min. 25 min. 30 min.
Recorded Programme (Title List)” on
titles. page 33). To cancel dubbing HSP Approx. Approx. Approx.
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more 6 min. 16 min. 20 min.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU. 6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles than one second. 40 sec. 40 sec.
The System Menu appears. in the order you want to dub. When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway, SP Approx. Approx. Approx.
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER. 7 Select “Next” using ,, and press no part of the title will be moved to the
dubbing target. However, note that this will
5 min. 12 min.
30 sec.
15 min.
ENTER.
3 Select a dubbing direction, and press
The “Title Edit” display appears.
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-
LSP Approx. Approx. Approx.
ENTER. Rs. 4 min. 10 min. 12 min.
For details about editing, see “To edit
To dub titles from the HDD to a disc, titles on the Dubbing List” on page 82. About dubbing mode ESP Approx. Approx. Approx.
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
select “DVD/CD -> HDD.” ENTER. dubbed at high speed (High-speed dubbing)
in the “Title Edit” display. The following LP Approx. Approx. Approx.
4 Select “Create New Dubbing List,”
The “Start Dubbing” display appears.
titles are dubbed at normal speed (Real-Time 2 min. 6 min. 7 min.
and press ENTER. dubbing). 30 sec. 15 sec. 30 sec.
The Dubbing List appears. – Titles containing both main and sub sounds EP Approx. Approx. Approx.
• If you have previously saved a Dubbing (except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)). 1 min. 60 min.*3 5 min.
List and want to resume editing it, – Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3 40 sec.*3
select “Use Previous Dubbing List,” and 16:9, etc.) (except for DVD-RWs/ SLP Approx. Approx. Approx.
and go to step 7. DVD-Rs (VR mode)). 1 min. 60 min.*3 3 min.
– Titles recorded on DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs 15 sec.*3 45 sec.
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
SEP Approx. Approx. Approx.
mode).
1 min.*3 60 min.*3 3 min.*3
9 Select an option using M/m, and press – 16:9 size titles recorded on DVD+RW/
DVD+R. *1
ENTER. The values in the above table are for reference
The options differ depending on the only. Actual times for dubbing also require time
The minimum required time is as follows for creating disc’s control information and other
dubbing direction or disc type.
(approximate). data.
“Recording Mode”: Changes the *2 This is the maximum recording speed of this
dubbing mode of all selected titles at a recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed the
time using M/m (page 51). value indicated in the above table even when
“Input Disc Name”: Changes the disc using discs that support higher recording speeds.
A Direction of dubbing name (page 37). In addition, depending on the disc condition, the
B Total number of titles to be dubbed “Finalise”: Select “Yes” to finalise a disc recorder may be unable to record at the
automatically after dubbing (DVD-RW/ maximum recording speed indicated in the table.
C Dubbing step number DVD-R (Video mode), or DVD+R).
*3 High-speed dubbing is not available when
Display 1: Select a title you want to dubbing titles recorded in SEP, SLP, or EP mode
dub (the “Select Titles” display). to DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.
Display 2: Edit a title (the “Title
Edit” display).
Display 3: Confirm the settings and
start dubbing (the “Start Dubbing”
display).
80 ,continued 81
1-19
To edit titles on the Dubbing List b Notes 10 Select “Yes” or “No,” and press
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Dubbing Using
• The Dubbing List you created remains after
dubbing. To edit the existing Dubbing List, select Making a Backup Disc ENTER.
Dubbing List” on page 80. To erase the backup data on the HDD,
The “Title Edit” display appears.
“Use Previous Dubbing List” in step 4. The
Dubbing List is cleared when:
(DVD Backup) select “Yes.”
– you change “Input Line System” setting in the To make another backup disc later, select
“Basic” setup (page 110). +RW -RWVideo +R -RVideo “No.”
– you reset the recorder (page 136). The recorder turns off automatically
– you open the disc tray (except when dubbing You can dub all of the contents on a finalised when you do not use the recorder for
from the HDD). DVD+RW/DVD+R or finalised DVD-RW/ more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
– you edit the titles on a disc (except when DVD-R (Video mode) to another recordable has finished.
dubbing from the HDD). DVD+RW/DVD-RW or unused DVD+R/
– you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist DVD-R via the HDD as a backup copy.
(when dubbing from DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in
To display the dubbing information
VR mode only). b Note Press DISPLAY while dubbing.
– you finalise the disc. Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made.
2 Select a title you want to edit, and press • The “seams” that are left over from editing may
To cancel DVD backup during dubbing
ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD+RWs/
DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
(Video mode). The System Menu appears.
than one second.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.
The options differ depending on the
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording
starts, even if you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
To erase backup data on the HDD
dubbing direction or disc type. 9. 3 Select “DVD Backup,” and press
1
82 83
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD • Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same tape being dubbed changes.
colour system (page 110).
Set the “DV Input” setting in the
become a single title. This title is divided into • A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed
“Audio In” setup (page 116). when the recorder is set to a different colour
chapters. When dubbing to the HDD or a
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) and when Hookups You are ready to start dubbing. Select system from the DV tape contents’ system. Set
“Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” in DVD recorder one of the dubbing methods on the “Input Line System” in the “Basic” setup to the
following pages. same colour system as the DV tape contents’
the “Recording” setup (page 121), each system (page 110).
shooting session on the tape becomes a
chapter on the disc. For other discs, the
recorder divides the title into chapters
To playback DV/Digital8 format tape
to DV IN
according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” or You can check the contents of DV/Digital8
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” setting in format tape before dubbing. For details, see
the “Recording” setup (page 122). “Playing from a DV Camcorder” on page 87.
z Hint
The recorder completes dubbing even after being
Preparing for DV camcorder turned off.
dubbing
i.LINK cable
You can connect a digital video camera to the (not supplied)
DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit
from a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is
straightforward because the recorder will fast
forward and rewind the tape for you – you do DV output
not need to operate your digital video camera.
Do the following to start using the “Manual
Dubbing” functions of this recorder. DV camcorder
See the instruction manual supplied with the : Signal flow
digital video camera as well before
connecting.
84 85
1-20
z Hint
Dubbing an Entire DV Dubbing Selected You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the
DISPLAY button during dubbing. Press the Playing from a DV
Format Tape (DV One Scenes (Manual DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing
menu.
Camcorder
Touch Dubbing) Dubbing) b Note 1 Connect your DV camcorder to the DV
You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one IN jack on the front panel.
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R second.
-RVR -RVideo -RVR -RVideo 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
You can record the entire contents of a DV/ You can select and dub scenes while playing
Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single a DV/Digital8 format tape. 3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.
press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on
the recorder. The recorder controls the digital 1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for 4 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER.
video camera for the whole process, and DV camcorder dubbing” on page 84. 5 Start playback on the DV camcorder.
completes the recording.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
Images from the DV camcorder appear
on your TV screen.
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for DV The System Menu appears.
camcorder dubbing” on page 84, and
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder. 3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.
To cancel playback
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts 4 Select “Manual Dubbing,” and press Press SYSTEM MENU.
recording the tape contents. ENTER.
After the recording is finished, the recorder z Hint
rewinds the tape in the digital video camera, 5 Select the recording destination, You can dub the playing tape contents. During
DV Camcorder Dubbing
and finalises the recorded disc (except DVD- “Record to Hard Disk Drive” or playback, press HDD or DVD to select the dubbing
RW/DVD-R (VR mode)) automatically. “Record to DVD,” and press ENTER. destination, and press z REC. To stop dubbing,
press x REC STOP.
6 Press H.
To stop during recording The scene starts to play.
Press x REC STOP more than 3 seconds. 7 Find the point on the DV/Digital8
Note that it may take a few seconds for the format tape that you want to start
recorder to stop recording. dubbing from using m/M or c/
z Hint C, and press X.
You can also start DV One Touch Dubbing by
selecting “One-Touch Dubbing” of “DV” in the
8 Select “Start Rec.,” and press ENTER.
System Menu. The recorder starts dubbing.
b Notes
9 Select “Pause Rec,” and press
• When a blank space between the recordings on
ENTER.
the tape continues for more than two minutes, DV The recorder pauses dubbing.
One Touch Dubbing ends automatically.
• The recorder will pause recording when there is a
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more
blank space or an image containing copy scenes.
protection signals on the tape. The recorder will
resume recording automatically when receiving a
11 Select “Stop Rec,” and press ENTER.
recordable signal. The selected scenes are dubbed as a
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts single title.
(except for DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)).
• DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically
when there are images containing copy protection To cancel during “Manual Dubbing”
signals at the beginning of the tape. Press SYSTEM MENU.
86 87
To lock the recorder (Child Lock) Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a b Note
You can lock all of the buttons on the CD “A-B Repeat” is not available for MP3 audio tracks.
Audio Tracks recorder so that the settings are not cancelled • When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive
by mistake. noise will be heard from the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
Playing Audio Tracks When the recorder is turned off, hold down x
on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in
DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks.
To avoid possible damage to the audio system,
from CD/DVD the front panel display. The recorder does not the user should take proper precautions when the
LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT
CD DATA DVD DATA CD
work except for timer recordings while the You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are connected
CD DATA DVD DATA CD Child Lock is set. single track on an album or disc.
to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital
Surround™ playback, an external DTS decoder
You can play audio tracks on CDs, DATA
DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/
To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the the recorder. The “Play Mode” menu appears.
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs), or front panel display. • Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO
DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs). button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD 2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
(page 88).
Playback options
3 Select an item to be repeated using M/
[/1 m.
CD DATA DVD DATA CD Playing a specific portion “Repeat Disc”: repeats all of the tracks
on a disc.
repeatedly (A-B Repeat) “Repeat Album” (except for CD): repeats
AUDIO Buttons Operations the current album.
CLEAR CD
PLAY AUDIO Selects stereo or monaural “Repeat Track”: repeats the current
MODE audio tracks recorded on the 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. track.
disc when pressed repeatedly The “Play Mode” menu appears. “Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
</M/m/,, in normal playback mode. programme (page 90).
ENTER 2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press
./>
(previous/
Goes to the next or previous
track when pressed during ENTER. 4 Press ENTER.
Audio Tracks
88 ,continued 89
1-21
To cancel Programme play 4 Press the number buttons to select the
Creating your own programme Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set Searching for an Audio number of the album or track you
(Programme) “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play” want.
in the “Play Mode” menu. Track If you make a mistake, select another
CD DATA DVD DATA CD number.
To erase the programme CD DATA DVD DATA CD
You can play the contents of an album or disc Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set 5 Press ENTER.
in the order you want by arranging the order “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in You can search a disc by album or track. As The recorder starts playback from the
of the albums/tracks on a disc to create your the “Play Mode” menu. albums and tracks are assigned individual selected number.
own programme. You can make a numbers, select the album or track by
programme of up to 24 steps. z Hints entering its number.
• The programme you made remains after z Hint
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. Programme play finishes. To play the same You can select an album or track using M/m in step
4.
The “Play Mode” menu appears. programme again, set “Programme” to “Start
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.
2 Select “Programme,” and press However, the programme is cleared after you Number
buttons
ENTER. remove the disc or press ?/1.
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and “Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu PLAY
MODE
press ENTER. (page 89).
The “Input/Edit Programme” display • You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode”
in the System Menu.
differs depending upon the disc type. </M/m/,,
Example: DATA DVD ENTER
Audio Tracks
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press
4 Select an album (example: ENTER.
01.BRAHMS) using M/m, and press 3 Select a search method, and press
,. ENTER.
5 Select a track (example: “Album Search” (except for CD)
001.SYMPHONY01) using M/m, and “Track Search”
press ENTER. The display for entering the number
The track is programmed. appears.
If you make a mistake, select the step Example: Album Search
number (example: 01-001) using </M/
m, and press CLEAR.
6 To programme other tracks, press </
M/m/, to select a step number, and
repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 Press H.
Programme play starts.
90 91
• Play audio tracks using various play modes. USB device to the HDD. 3 Press HDD/DVD DUB.
• Label tracks or albums. For CDs, all the tracks on the disc are To cancel copying
• Assign albums a genre. copied to the HDD. Press ENTER.
• Change the track order. For DATA CDs/ DATA DVDs, the
Notes on copying current album is copied to the HDD.
• You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to
discs or USB devices.
• Some audio tracks may not be copied depending To cancel copying
on the file size. SYSTEM
Press ENTER.
• You cannot copy audio tracks if the HDD is full MENU
or almost full. z Hint
</M/m/,,
• An album name and MP3 audio track name are You can copy all the contents on the disc by
ENTER
also copied. However, there may be some names selecting “DVD/CD -> HDD” in “Dubbing” in the
that cannot be copied. System Menu.
• When copying is stopped partway, tracks finished
copying before you stop will remain copied onto
H
the HDD as an album. See the Album List to
check which albums have been copied (page 94).
Copying an album
• When copying audio tracks from a CD, the album
HDD/DVD
DUB (USB t HDD)
Audio Tracks
92 93
1-22
4 Select an album or track, and press To skip a track (Set Skip)
Playing Audio Tracks ENTER. If you want a track not to play, set the track to Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
Playback starts from the selected album be skipped.
Using Jukebox/USB or track. 1 Select a track you want to skip.
You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a
single track in the album.
Device 2 Press , while the Album List is
To stop playback displayed. 1 Press , during playback.
Press x (stop). 3 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press 2 Select “Play Mode,” using M/m, and
ENTER. press ENTER.
To scroll the list display by page (Page
4 Select “Set Skip” using M/m, and press The “Play Mode” menu appears.
mode)
Press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next)
ENTER.
“ ” appears next to the selected track.
3 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
SUBTITLE
CLEAR while the Album List is displayed. Each time
you press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE
To cancel, select “Set Skip,” and press 4 Select an item to be repeated using M/
ANGLE (next), the entire Album List changes to the
ENTER again. m.
SYSTEM
MENU next/previous page of the album. “Repeat Album”: repeats the current
album.
</M/m/,, To change the album order (Sort Titles)
Playback options “Repeat Track”: repeats the current
ENTER track.
(HDD only)
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
. > 1 Press < while the Album List is Buttons Operations
programme (page 96).
m M displayed. ./>
H x 2 Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press (previous/
Goes to the next or previous
track when pressed during 5 Press ENTER.
X next) playback. Repeat play starts.
ENTER.
m/M Fast reverses/fast forwards the
3 Select the item using M/m, and press (fast disc when pressed during
ENTER. reverse/fast playback.
To cancel Repeat play
Audio Tracks
forward) Search speed changes as Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in the “Play
Order Sorted
1 Press SYSTEM MENU. By number In order of album
follows:
fast reverse fast forward
Mode” menu.
The System Menu appears. number. mT tM b Notes
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press By favourite In order of playback mTT ttM • You can select “Repeat Programme” only during
Programme play.
ENTER. times. The album that is When you press and hold the
button, fast forward/fast • “A-B Repeat” is not available when using “Music
most often played is listed
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit” or at the top. reverse continues at the Jukebox.”
“Listen to Music from USB Device,” selected speed until you release
By album In alphabetical order. the button.
and press ENTER. To resume normal playback,
To listen to the audio tracks on the HDD, To search for the album by genre (Genre) press H.
select “Listen to Music / Edit.” (HDD only)
To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from X (pause) Pauses playback.
1 Press < while the Album List is To resume normal playback,
the connected USB device, select “Listen
press H.
to Music from USB Device.” displayed.
The Album List appears. 2 Select “Genre” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3 Select the genre using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The albums in the selected genre appear.
To display all albums, select “All
Genres.”
94 ,continued 95
96 97
1-23
4 Select the item, and press ENTER.
Connecting the USB device To copy from DATA CDs/DATA DVDs Copying all JPEG image files
JPEG Image Files (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs), select “View from the connected USB device
You can connect a USB device (digital still Photos on a CD/DVD.”
(USB t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
About the “Photo camera, Memory card reader, and USB
memory) to the USB jack on the recorder to
To copy from the connected USB device,
select “View Photos on a USB Device.”
Album” Function view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD. The “Photo Album” list appears. 1 Connect the USB device to the USB
Refer to the operating instructions supplied Example: CD/DVD jack on the recorder.
with the USB device before connecting.
The “Photo Album” function enables you to
DVD recorder
2 Insert a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video
do following. mode).
• Store JPEG image files on the HDD.
• View JPEG image files on the HDD, DATA 3 Press SYSTEM MENU.
DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs)/DATA CDs, to USB jack
The System Menu appears.
or connected USB device.
• Edit JPEG image files.
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
• Print JPEG image files.
• Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to The “Photo Album” menu appears.
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs.
5 Select an album or JPEG image file
5 Select “Copy Photos from a Digital
Camera,” and press ENTER.
USB cable (not supplied) using M/m, and press ,.
The display asks for confirmation.
The sub-menu appears.
Preparing for Using the
USB output
6 Select an item, and press ENTER.
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
To copy two or more albums or JPEG
“Photo Album” Function Digital still camera image files, select “Multi-Mode.”
To copy all the albums and JPEG image z Hint
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the files, select “Copy all to HDD,” and go to See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 42) to format
recorder, or copy JPEG image files from : Signal flow DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
step 11.
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected To copy the album or file selected in step
USB device to the HDD. 5 only, select “Copy to HDD,” and go to
b Notes
5 Press ENTER, and select a JPEG 11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER. 4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
image file using M/m. Copying JPEG image albums to The selected JPEG image albums are HDD,” and press ENTER.
6 Press ,. a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R) copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the The “Photo Album” list appears.
disc.
The sub-menu appears. You can copy the edited JPEG image albums The JPEG image album names are 5 Select an album using M/m, and press
ENTER.
7 Select an item, and press ENTER. to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode). automatically labelled as “***ALBUM.”
The photo list appears.
To copy two or more albums or files, A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a If you want to play the disc on other
select “Multi-Mode.” video file. You can play the slideshow on DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 40).
6 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,
To copy the selected album, select “Copy other DVD equipment that may not be and press ,.
Album Contents” in “Album Options,” compatible with the playback of JPEG image • To cancel, select “No.”
The sub-menu appears.
and go to step 12. files.
To copy the selected files, select “Copy” 7 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
in “File Options,” and go to step 12. 1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video z Hints
• See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 42) to format
ENTER.
mode). To copy the JPEG image file selected in
8 Select an album or JPEG image file, DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
step 6 only, go to step 11.
and press ENTER. 2 Press SYSTEM MENU. • See the “Photo Album” list to check which
A check mark appears in the check box The System Menu appears.
albums have been copied (page 102). 8 Select a JPEG image file, and press
ENTER.
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow A check mark appears in the check box
ENTER. by the selected item.
again. depending on DVD equipment.
• To clear all check marks, select The “Photo Album” menu appears. • You cannot copy JPEG image files to a • To clear the check mark, press ENTER
“Single-Mode.” 4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the HDD,” and press ENTER. • DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not “Single-Mode.”
albums or JPEG image files you want The “Photo Album” list appears. be able to play on other equipment (page 40).
to copy. 5 Select an album using M/m, and press • No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a 9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the JPEG
disc. image files you want to copy.
10 Press ,. ,. • When copying an album containing more than 99
The sub-menu appears. The sub-menu appears. JPEG image files to a disc, slideshows will be 10 Press ,.
11 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER. 6 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
created with every 99 JPEG image files and The sub-menu appears.
JPEG Image Files
recorded to a disc.
ENTER. • For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not 11 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press
12 Select the destination album using M/ To copy the album selected in step 5 increase even if you erase slideshows. ENTER.
m, and press ENTER. only, go to step 10. The display asks for confirmation.
• To cancel, select “No.”
7 Select an album, and press ENTER.
Copying JPEG image files to a 12 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box The selected JPEG image files are copied
b Note by the selected item. disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R) in the “PICTURE” folder on the disc.
Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the • To clear the check mark, press ENTER The JPEG image file names are
HDD in the following cases. again. You can copy the edited JPEG image files to automatically labelled as “PHOT****.”
– when the HDD disc space is insufficient for • To clear all check marks, select a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode). If you want to play the disc on other
copying. “Single-Mode.” A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a DVD equipment, finalise the disc
– when there are already the maximum number of video file. You can play the slideshow on
files and/or albums on the HDD. 8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the other DVD equipment that may not be
(page 40).
• To cancel, select “No.”
albums you want to copy. compatible with the playback of JPEG image
9 Press ,. files.
The sub-menu appears. To select a JPEG image file from a
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video different album
10 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press mode).
ENTER. 1 Switch to the album list in step 8.
The display asks for confirmation.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU. For instructions, see “To switch between
The System Menu appears. the album list and JPEG image file list”
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press on page 103.
ENTER. 2 Select an album using M/m, and press
The “Photo Album” menu appears. <.
1-24
3 Switch to the JPEG image file list. 12-Photo List (Example: HDD) C Sub-menu:
For instructions, see “To switch between
the album list and JPEG image file list”
Using the “Photo Album” Press , to display the sub-menu.
The sub-menu displays options
on page 103. List applicable only to the selected item. The
4 Select a JPEG image file using M/m, and displayed options differ depending upon
press ENTER. You can play JPEG image files on the HDD, the model, situation, and disc type.
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected
z Hints USB device using the “Photo Album” list.
• See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 42) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which
albums have been copied (page 102).
b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow
depending on DVD equipment.
m
4-Photo List
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a ANGLE Sub-menu
SYSTEM
recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
MENU D Scroll bar:
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not </M/m/,, Appears when all of the JPEG image files
be able to play on other equipment (page 40). ENTER do not fit on the list. To view the hidden
• No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a O RETURN JPEG image files, press M/m.
disc. . > E Album and JPEG image file
• For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not
increase even if you erase slideshows. H information:
x
X Displays the image, JPEG image file
number, recording date and time, JPEG
image file name, and JPEG image file
size.
F Disc type and remaining space of
1 m current disc
To reload the files or folders To play a slideshow with the sound (HDD To rotate an image
When a disc or the connected USB device
contains 1,000 or more files and/or 100 or
only) Press ANGLE repeatedly during a slideshow.
Each time you press ANGLE, the image turns
Managing JPEG Image
You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to
more folders, select “Read next” in the the sound stored in the HDD. clockwise by 90°. Files on the HDD
“Photo Album” list, and press ENTER to
view unloaded files or folders.
1 Select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD” z Hint
in step 3 of “Using the “Photo Album” You can start a slideshow by selecting “Start
It may take a few minutes to load files or
List” on page 102. Slideshow” from the sub-menu.
folders.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
b Note Switch between the album list and JPEG
The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on image file list, if necessary.
the recorder is displayed as “ .” 2 Select an album or JPEG image file using
M/m, and press ,.
SYSTEM
Viewing a JPEG image file 3 Select “Start Audio Slideshow,” and MENU
press ENTER.
</M/m/,,
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the 4 Select a genre using </,. ENTER
“Photo Album” List.” For details about assigning a genre, see
The “Photo Album” list appears. “Managing Audio Tracks on the Music
Switch to the album list, if necessary. Jukebox” on page 97.
2 Select a JPEG image file using M/m, 5 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The slideshow and the playback from the
and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image file is
first track of the selected genre start. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
displayed on the entire screen. The System Menu appears.
b Notes
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may 2 Select “Photo Album,” and press
be displayed with black bands at top and bottom, ENTER.
To display the detailed information or left and right. The “Photo Album” menu appears.
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to
1 Select a JPEG image file, and press ,.
display. This is not a malfunction. 3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
JPEG Image Files
2 Select “Detailed Information,” and press • All albums or tracks in the selected genre will be HDD,” and press ENTER.
ENTER. played during Slideshow even if some albums or
The “Photo Album” list appears.
The detailed information for the selected tracks are set to skip.
JPEG image file appears. 4 Select an album or JPEG image file,
To stop a slideshow and press ,.
Press x (stop) or O RETURN. The sub-menu appears.
Playing a slideshow 5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
To pause a slideshow
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the Press X (pause). You can make the following edits to the
Note that only slideshow pauses and the album/JPEG image file.
“Photo Album” List.”
sound continues to play.
The “Photo Album” list appears. “Start Slideshow”: Starts a slideshow
Switch between the album list and JPEG To view the next/previous image during a (page 104).
image file list, if necessary. “Start Audio Slideshow” (HDD only):
slideshow
2 Select an album or JPEG image file Press ./>. Starts a slideshow with the sound
using M/m, and press H. (page 104).
The slideshow starts. To zoom an image “New Album”: Creates a new album.
If you press H while selecting a JPEG Press ENTER repeatedly during a slideshow.
image file, the slideshow starts from the Each time you press ENTER, the “Album Options”
selected JPEG image file. magnification changes as shown below. • “Erase Album”: Erases the selected
2× t 4× t normal magnification album.
You can move the area you want to zoom • “Copy Album Contents”: Copies all
using </M/m/,. JPEG image files in the selected album
to the HDD (page 99).
1-25
• “Rename Album”: Changes the 2 Connect the USB device to the USB 13 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
selected album name (page 37).
• “Protect Album Contents”: Protects all
Printing JPEG Image jack on the recorder. You can set the paper size and layout.
Refer to the operating instructions
When printing JPEG image files on the
JPEG image files in the selected album. Files HDD, skip this step. supplied with the printer.
• “Cancel Protection”: Cancels
protection of all JPEG image files in the You can print JPEG image files on the HDD
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.
selected album. The System Menu appears. To cancel printing
or connected USB device by connecting a
“Copy to DVD”: Copies the selected
PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB 4 Select “Photo Album,” and press Press ENTER.
jack on the recorder. ENTER.
album or JPEG image file to a DVD Refer to the instructions supplied with the The “Photo Album” menu appears.
To display the connected printer
(page 100). printer. Select “Confirm Printer” of “USB” in the
“Multi-Mode”: Selects multiple albums 5 Select the item, and press ENTER. “Options 2” setup (page 128).
or JPEG image files to edit. To print JPEG image files on the HDD,
“Copy all to HDD”: Copies all the select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.” To restart the connected USB device
albums and JPEG image files to the HDD To print JPEG image files from the Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in the
(page 98). connected USB device, select “View “Options 2” setup (page 128).
“Copy to HDD”: Copies the selected Photos on a USB Device.”
album or JPEG image file to the HDD The “Photo Album” list appears. z Hint
(page 98). Printing options, such as paper size or layout, differ
SYSTEM
MENU
6 Select an album, and press ENTER. depending on the printer. For details, refer to the
“File Options” instructions supplied with the printer.
• “Erase”: Erases the selected JPEG </M/m/,,
image file. ENTER
• “Copy”: Copies the selected JPEG
image file (page 99).
• “Rename File”: Changes the selected
JPEG image file name (page 37).
• “Protect”: Protects the selected JPEG
image file. Select again to cancel the 1 Connect a PictBridge-compatible
106 107
b Notes
• It will take about eight hours to optimise the
HDD. During optimisation, other operations,
such as recording or playback, cannot be
performed.
• You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD
disc space is insufficient for optimising. Erase 3 Press </, to select the time zone for
titles to open up disc space (page 72). your area, and press m.
Basic Format HDD. 4 Select “On” if you are now on summer
Clock Setting time, and press ENTER.
Input Disc Name You can format the HDD and resolve the
Auto (Auto Clock Set)
Settings and Adjustments
You can label a disc. problem when the hard disk error occurred.
For details, see page 38. “Format HDD.” can be selected only when Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a
the hard disk needs formatting. Note that all programme position in your local area
Protect Disc broadcasts a time signal.
You can protect a disc against erasure. of the recorded content on the HDD will be
For details, see page 39. erased. 1 Select “Clock Setting” in “Basic,” and
1 Select “Format HDD.” in “Disc Setup,” press ENTER.
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)
The recorder automatically starts formatting and press ENTER. 2 Select “Auto,” and press ENTER.
in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is 2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
selected below, when a new, unformatted
DVD-RW is inserted.
1-26
5 Press M/m to set the day, and press ,. HELP Setting Download from TV
Set the month, year, hour, and minutes in
sequence. Press </, to select the item On Displays Help information for Aerial Reception If you connect a TV to this recorder with
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme
to be set, then press M/m to set the GUI displays.
Settings (Tuner) positions by downloading from your TV.
numbers. The day of the week is set For details, refer to the operating instructions
Off Does not set to HELP setting
automatically. mode. The “Tuner” setup helps you to make tuner supplied with your TV.
Press </, repeatedly until the programme Set number CC1, and channel Q is indicated
position you want is displayed. by Channel Set number CC23 (see the table S27 CC30 347.25–355.25
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not below). If the CATV channel you want to
• To select a cable or satellite programme
work effectively, select “Off” and press m. S28 CC31 355.25–363.25
position, press </, until the programme preset is indicated by its frequency (for
Press </, to obtain a clearer picture, and example, 152.75 MHz), refer to the table S29 CC32 363.25–371.25
position you want is displayed.
press ENTER. below to find the corresponding channel S30 CC33 371.25–379.25
Receivable channels number.
S31 CC34 379.25–387.25
TV system Channel coverage Corre- Channel Receivable
S32 CC35 387.25–395.25
sponding Set Frequency
BG (West European E2 – E12 VHF channel number range (MHz) S33 CC36 395.25–403.25
Countries, except
Italia A – H VHF B CC1 116.75–124.75 S34 CC37 403.25–411.25
those listed below)
E21 – E69 UHF C CC2 124.75–132.75 S35 CC38 411.25–419.25
S1 – S20 CATV D CC3 132.75–140.75 S36 CC39 419.25–427.25
S21 – S41 HYPER D CC4 140.75–148.75 S37 CC40 427.25–435.25
S01 – S05 CATV E CC5 148.75–156.75 S38 CC41 435.25–443.25
F CC6 156.75–164.75 S39 CC42 443.25–451.25
F CC7 164.75–172.75 S40 CC43 451.25–459.25
G CC8 172.75–180.75 S41 CC44 459.25–467.25
1-27
z Hint LINE 1 In
Channel Swapping Video Settings (Video In/ When “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC,” you Selects a method of inputting video signals
can select “Auto,” “3.58NTSC,” or “PAL-60.” for the LINE 1/DECODER jack. The picture
After the programme positions have been set,
you can change the order of each programme
Out) Component Video Out
will not be clear if this setting does not match
the type of video input signal.
position in the display list. Selects the signal format in which the
The “Video In/Out” settings will adjust items recorder outputs video signals: interlace or Video Inputs video signals.
1 Select “Channel Swapping” in “Tuner,” related to the image, such as size and colour. progressive, from the COMPONENT
and press ENTER. Select the settings according to the type of S-Video Inputs S-video signals.
VIDEO OUT jacks.
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER. TV, tuner, or decoder connected to the DVD
recorder. Normal(Inter- Outputs signals in the RGB Inputs RGB signals.
lace) interlace format.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
Progressive Outputs signals in the
Decoder Select this when connecting
to an external decoder
recorder is in stop mode.
progressive format. Select (PAY-TV/Canal Plus
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press this when you want to view
progressive signals.
analogue decoder). If you
connect to a cable box/
ENTER.
satellite receiver such as
3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press b Notes CanalSat, do not select this
option.
ENTER. • When you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” you
3 Press M/m to select the programme The “Video In/Out” setup appears with cannot set “Component Video Out.”
position number you want to swap, and the following options. The default • When you connect the recorder to a monitor or NTSC on PAL TV
press ,. settings are underlined. projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO Sets the recorder to convert signals of the
• To display other pages, press ./ OUT jacks, do not set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB.” If NTSC colour system to the PAL colour
> repeatedly. you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” in this case, the
system to play NTSC discs on PAL-only
picture may not appear.
4 Press M/m to select the programme • When picture noise appears after you set the TVs. Refer to the operating instructions
position number to swap for the one recorder to progressive format, hold down supplied with your TV.
selected in step 3, and press ENTER. x (stop) on the recorder, and press Z (open/
close) on the recorder. On Plays NTSC discs on PAL-
The programme position numbers are only TVs.
swapped. • No video signals are output when using the
• To swap the programme position HDMI connection.
Off Select this if the connected
number of another station, repeat from TV is a multi-system
LINE 3 Out
step 3. (NTSC-compatible) TV.
Selects a method of outputting video signals
114 115
1-28
MPEG Output (DVD VIDEOs only) Auto Language
Selects the type of MPEG audio signal. Language Settings The “Auto Language” function is available
when “Audio Language” and “Subtitle
Recording Settings
MPEG Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
(Language) Language” are set to the same language, and (Recording)
“Subtitle Display” is set to “On.”
audio component with a
built-in MPEG decoder. The “Language” setup allows you to adjust On For DVD VIDEOs whose
The “Recording” setup allows you to adjust
language settings. main audio track is the recording settings.
MPEG -> Select this when the language you set in “Audio
PCM recorder is connected to an
audio component without a
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the Language” and “Subtitle 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
recorder is in stop mode. Language,” the recorder recorder is in stop mode.
built-in MPEG decoder. If plays the main audio track
you play MPEG audio
sound tracks, the recorder
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press without subtitles. 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
ENTER. For DVD VIDEOs whose ENTER.
outputs stereo signals via main audio track is not the
the DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
3 Select “Language,” and press ENTER. language you set in “Audio 3 Select “Recording,” and press
The “Language” setup appears with the Language” and “Subtitle ENTER.
following options. The default settings Language,” the recorder The “Recording” setup appears with the
b Note are underlined. plays the main audio track following options. The default settings
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment with subtitles in the
language you set.
are underlined.
not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the PCM
signals will be automatically output even when you
select “MPEG.” Off Turns off the function.
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) DVD Menu Language (DVD VIDEO only)
(DVDs only) Switches the language for the DVD menu.
Selects the dynamic range (difference Select “w/Subtitle Language” to set the same
between soft and loud sounds) setting when language as the language you set in “Subtitle
playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio Language.”
DRC.” This affects the output from the
following jacks: OSD Language Subtitle Display
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks Switches the display language on the screen. Manual Rec. Mode
– LINE 3 – TV jack On Displays subtitles.
– LINE 1/DECODER jack Audio Language (DVD VIDEO only) On (go to Allows you to select all
b Note
If you select a language in “DVD Menu Language,”
“Subtitle Language,” or “Audio Language” that is
not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of the
recorded languages will be automatically selected.
Manual recording mode Approx. recording time Approx. recording time For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set
The table below shows the approximate (hours) (hours) to “Video Mode On”)/DVD+RW/DVD-RW
Recording
recording times for the HDD and the different mode Recording (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)
RDR- RDR- DVD+RW/
DVD types in each manual recording mode, mode HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN9: 720 × 480 / 720
HX750 HX950 DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/
as well as the standard recording mode DVD+R/ DVD-R DL × 576
equivalents. MN5 235 370 DVD-R MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576
MN4 (SLP) 270 425 MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288
MN9 (LP) 4 7 hr. 11 min.
The recording time for the HDD MN3 (SEP) 340 530
MN8 4 hr. 30 min. 8 hr. 4 min. Rec. Mode Adjust
Approx. recording time
MN2 405 635 MN7 5 8 hr. 58 min.
Recording (hours) On Automatically adjusts the
mode MN1 455 710 MN6*3 (EP) 6 10 hr. 46 min. recording mode to enable
RDR- RDR-
HX750 HX950 the entire programme to be
*3
MN5 7 12 hr. 34 min. recorded (page 54).
HQ+*1 23 36 The recording time for DVDs
MN4*3 (SLP) 8 14 hr. 21 min.
Off Turns off the function.
PCM*2 34 53 Approx. recording time *3*4 *4
(hours) MN3 (SEP ) 10 17 hr. 57 min.
MN32 (HQ) 34 53
Recording DVD+RW/ MN2*3*4 12 21 hr. 32 min. Set Thumbnail
MN31 36 57 mode Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture
DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/ MN1*3*4 13 hr. 24
MN30 39 61 DVD+R/ DVD-R DL 22 min. shown in the Title List.
DVD-R
MN29 42 66 *1
Records in higher quality (15 Mbps). 0 seconds The first frame of the title is
PCM*2 1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min. HQ+ mode is not available for DVDs. When set for the thumbnail
MN28 45 70
MN32 (HQ) 1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min. recording to DVDs, the recording mode picture.
MN27 48 75 automatically switches to HQ mode even if you
MN31 1 hr. 5 min. 1 hr. 57 min. set to HQ+ mode. 30 seconds The frame at 30 seconds
MN26 (HSP) 50 79 *2 Audio signals are recorded in 48kHz PCM
MN30 1 hr. 10 min. 2 hr. 6 min. from the first frame is set for
MN25 53 84 format, and video signals are recorded in HQ the thumbnail picture.
MN29 1 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 15 min. mode. When recording a bilingual programme,
MN24 56 88 select the sound to be recorded (page 116). 3 minutes The frame at 3 minutes from
MN28 1 hr. 20 min. 2 hr. 24 min. *3 Titles recorded in MN6 or lower mode cannot be
MN23 59 92 the first frame is set for the
MN27 1 hr. 25 min. 2 hr. 33 min. dubbed to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs at high speed. thumbnail picture.
MN22 62 97 *4 SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode is not available
MN26 (HSP) 1 hr. 30 min. 2 hr. 41 min. for DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R DLs. When
MN21 (SP) 68 105 Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) (HDD/DVD-RW/
Settings and Adjustments
1-29
Auto Chapter (Video) (DVD-RW/DVD-R in 4:3 Letter Box Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only)
Video mode only) Playback Settings Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be
limited according to a predetermined level,
No
Separation
No chapter mark is inserted. (Playback) such as the age of the users. Scenes may be
blocked or replaced with different scenes.
4:3 Pan Scan
10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at The “Playback” setup allows you to adjust 1 Select “Parental Control” in “Playback,”
approximately 10-minute the playback settings. and press ENTER.
intervals. When you have already registered a
15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the password, go to step 3.
recorder is in stop mode. 16:9 2 Select “Set Password,” and press
approximately 15-minute
intervals. 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press ENTER.
ENTER. The display for registering a new
password appears.
Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) (DVD+RW/
DVD+R only)
3 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER.
The “Playback” setup appears with the b Note
following options. The default settings Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be
No No chapter mark is inserted.
are underlined. selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or
Separation
vice-versa.
10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 10-minute Pause Mode
intervals. Selects the picture quality in pause mode.
the disc, select “Off” in step 9. Note that this setting is effective only for
HDMI connection.
Change Password
1 Select “Parental Control” in “Playback,” Full Select this when you can
and press ENTER. change the aspect ratio on
your TV.
2 Select “Change Password,” and press Screen Resolution
ENTER. Selects the type of video signals output from Normal Select this when you cannot
change the aspect ratio on
3 Enter your four-digit password in the the HDMI OUT jack. If the picture is not your TV. Shows a 4:3 size
“Current Password” row using the clear, natural or to your satisfaction, try video with the aspect ratio
number buttons, and press ENTER. another option that suits the disc and your as it is.
TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to the
4 Enter a new password in the “New
instruction manual supplied with the TV/
Password” row using the number
projector, etc.
buttons, and press ENTER.
1920 x 1080p Sends 1920×1080p video
signals.
16:9 aspect ratio TV
1920 x 1080i Sends 1920×1080i video
signals.
1-30
Colour HDMI Control Command Mode
Selects the method of outputting video
signals for the HDMI jack. On Allows you to use the Other Settings (Options) Changes the Command Mode of the recorder
to avoid interference with your other Sony
HDMI control features
DVD recorder or player.
RGB (0-255) Outputs RGB (0-255) (page 18). The “Options” and “Options 2” setups allow
signals. Select this when you to set up other operational settings. 1 Select “Command Mode” in “Options,”
connecting to an RGB (0- Off Turns off the function. and press ENTER.
255) device. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the 2 Select a Command Mode (DVD1,
recorder is in stop mode. DVD2, or DVD3), and press ENTER.
RGB (16-235) Outputs RGB (16-235)
signals. Select this if
colours appear overly rich
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press b Note
ENTER. The default command mode setting for this
and the black appears too recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.
deep. 3 Select “Options” or “Options 2,” and The remote does not function if different
press ENTER. command modes are set for the recorder and
YCbCr 4:2:2 Outputs 10-bit YCbCr remote. Set the same command mode.
4:2:2 component signals. The “Options” or “Options 2” setup
appears with the following options. The 3 Set the Command Mode for the remote
YCbCr 4:4:4 Outputs 8-bit YCbCr default settings are underlined. so it matches the Command Mode for the
4:4:4 component signals. Example: “Options” setup recorder you set above.
Follow the steps below to set the
b Notes Command Mode on the remote.
• Some settings may not be available depending on 1 Hold down ENTER.
the connected device. 2 While holding down ENTER, enter
• When a DVI device is connected, you cannot the Command Mode code number
select “YCbCr 4:2:2” or “YCbCr 4:4:4.”
using the number buttons.
• When “Screen Resolution” is set to “720 x 576i”
(or “720 x 480i”) in the “HDMI Output” setup, Command Mode Code number
you cannot select “YCbCr 4:2:2.”
DVD1 number button 1
Audio Output DVD2 number button 2
Selects the type of audio signal output from Options DVD3 number button 3
the HDMI OUT jack.
On Screen Display 3 Hold down both the number and
Auto Outputs Dolby Digital,
1-31
There is no picture or picture noise appears TV channels cannot be changed. Programme listings for some programme
when connected to the HDMI OUT jack. , The channel is skipped (page 112).
GUIDE Plus+ system positions are missing.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off , A timer recording started, which changed , The programme guide data may not be
GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.
and on again. 2Turn the connected the channels. updated. Turn off the recorder and let the
, 1Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect recorder receive the programme guide data.
programme listings do not appear until the
and then connect the HDMI cord again. The picture from equipment connected to , Some broadcast stations support only two
recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video the recorder’s input jack does not appear days of data. For details, see the following
2Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug
output, changing the “Screen Resolution” website:
on the screen. it. 3Wait for 24 hours. It may take several
setting in the “HDMI Output” setup may www.europe.guideplus.com
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE
solve the problem (page 125). Connect the , All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
1/DECODER jack, select “L1” in the front Plus+ data for all programme positions. If
TV and the recorder using a video jack received because the reception is poor.
panel display by pressing INPUT. the recorder does not receive the GUIDE
other than HDMI OUT, and switch the
If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host
TV’s input to the connected video input so The programme listing is not up to date.
IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel channel manually (page 49).
that you can see the on-screen displays. , The recorder was in use during the time that
display by pressing INPUT. , The country/region or postal code is
Change the “Screen Resolution” setting in the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled to be
incorrect. Correctly set your country/region
the “HDMI Output” setup, and switch the downloaded.
The playback picture or TV programme and postal code (page 23).
TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture still , All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
from the equipment connected through the , When the recorder is connected to a set top
does not appear, repeat the steps and try received because the reception is poor.
box receiver, the set top box receiver must
other options. recorder is distorted.
be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus+
, The recorder is connected to an input device , If the playback picture output from a DVD
data.
that is not HDCP compliant (page 16). player, VCR, or tuner goes through your
, Area numbers that cannot be received using Sound
, When picture noise appears after you recorder before reaching your TV, the copy-
GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy Setup”
change the “Screen Resolution” setting, protection signal applied to some There is no sound.
in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and programmes could affect picture quality.
, Re-connect all connections securely.
the System Menu, and follow the on-screen
press Z (open/close) on the recorder. Disconnect the playback equipment in
, The connecting cord is damaged.
instructions to make the settings again
question and connect it directly to your TV.
(page 23). , The input source setting on the audio
TV programme reception does not fill the , The “Time Lock” function on your cable component or the connection to the audio
screen. The picture does not fill the screen. box is activated. Set this function to off. component is incorrect.
, Set the channel manually in “Manual CH , Set “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup in , If the host channel has changed or moved, , The recorder is in reverse play, fast-
Setting” in the “Tuner” setup (page 111). accordance with the screen size of your TV the programme guide data cannot be forward, slow motion, or pause mode.
, Select the correct source using the INPUT (page 122). received. In this case, follow the steps in , If the audio signal does not come through
button, or select a channel of any TV “Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI
programme using the PROG +/– buttons. The picture does not fill the screen, even channel” (page 48) to update the host OUT jacks, check the “Audio Out” setup
though the picture size is set in “TV Type” channel setting. If the problem persists after (page 117).
Additional Information
TV programme pictures are distorted. in the “Playback” setup. waiting for one day, search for the host , The recorder supports only MP3 audio,
, Reorient the TV aerial. channel at the following website and set the Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX
, The picture size of the title is fixed.
, Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction host channel manually (page 49). video files. Press AUDIO and select MP3
manual). www.europe.guideplus.com audio or MPEG audio.
The picture is black and white.
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart. , Check that “LINE 3 Out” in the “Video In/
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables The programme position number in the No sound is output from the HDMI OUT
Out” setup is set to the appropriate item that
farther apart. conforms to your system (page 115). programme listing does not match the jack.
, The aerial cable is connected to the , If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to broadcast station. , Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder. use one that is fully wired (21 pins). , There may be more than one channel lineup and on again. 2Turn the connected
Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack. for your area. To change the channel lineup, equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
, The recorder’s colour system is different select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the and then connect the HDMI cord again.
from your TV. Hold down x (stop) on the GUIDE Plus+ system (page 49). , The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder device (DVI jacks do not accept audio
to change the recorder’s colour system. signals).
, The equipment connected to the HDMI
OUT jack does not conform to the audio
signal format. In this case, set “Audio
Output” to “PCM” in the “HDMI Output”
setup (page 126).
130 ,continued 131
Sound distortion occurs. The subtitle language cannot be changed The JPEG image files do not play.
, Set “Tuner Level” in the “Audio In” setup
Playback or turned off. , The JPEG image files are not recorded in a
to “Compression” (page 116).
The recorder does not play any type of disc , Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on format that the recorder can play
the DVD VIDEO. (page 139).
(except HDD). , Progressive JPEG images cannot be played.
Sound is noisy. , The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks, subtitles.
the labelled side facing up.
noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R- , Try changing the subtitle using the DVD TV Pause does not work.
, The disc is not correctly inserted.
AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 3 – TV jack, or VIDEO’s menu. , You are recording to the HDD or the HDD
, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.
LINE 1/DECODER jack (page 89). , The subtitles cannot be changed for the is full.
In this case, if the recorder is on, leave it on
titles recorded on this recorder.
(if it is off, leave it off) for about an hour
The sound volume is low. until the moisture evaporates.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs. , If the disc was recorded on another recorder The angles cannot be changed. Recording/Timer recording/
The sound volume may improve if you set and was not finalised (page 40), the , Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD Editing
“Audio DRC” in the “Audio Out” setup to recorder cannot play the disc. VIDEO being played.
“On” (page 118). , You are trying to change the angles when The programme position cannot be
, Set “Tuner Level” in the “Audio In” setup “ ” does not appear on the TV screen changed from the programme position you
The recorder does not start playback from
to “Normal” (page 116). (page 60). To display “ ” if various
the beginning. are recording.
angles (multi-angles) for a scene are
, Resume play was activated (page 61). , Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”
recorded on the disc, set “Angle Indicator”
An alternate audio track cannot be , You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu to “On” in the “Playback” setup (page 124).
recorded or played. or DVD menu automatically appears on the , The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing Recording does not start immediately
, When recording from connected TV screen when it is first inserted. Use the angles. after you press z REC.
equipment, set “External Audio” to menu to start playback. , Try changing the angle using the DVD , Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”
“Bilingual” in the “Audio In” setup VIDEO’s menu. “FORMAT,” or “INFO WRITE”
(page 116). The recorder starts playing automatically. , The angles cannot be changed for the titles disappears from the front panel display.
, Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot , The DVD VIDEO features an auto recorded on this recorder.
be recorded on the HDD (when Video playback function. , The angles cannot be changed during slow
Mode On) DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video
Nothing was recorded even though you set
motion playback or when playback is the timer setting correctly.
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video paused.
mode). To record the language, set
Playback stops automatically. , There was a power failure during recording.
“Bilingual Recording” in the “Audio In” , If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the , The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to
setup to “A/L” or “B/R” before recording recorder stops playback at the auto pause The DivX video files do not play. a power failure that lasted for more than 1
(page 116). To record both the main and sub signal. , The file is not created in DivX format. hour. Reset the clock (page 109).
sounds on a disc, record on DVD-RWs/ , The file has an extension other than “.avi” , The channel was disabled after the timer
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or or “.divx.” recording was set. See “Manual CH
Additional Information
1-32
Recording does not stop immediately The disc tray does not open after you press
after you press x REC STOP.
Dubbing Remote control Z (open/close).
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to You dubbed a title, but the title did not The remote does not function. , It may take a few seconds for the disc tray
input disc data before recording can stop. to open after you have recorded or edited a
appear in the HDD Title List. , Different command modes are set for the
On-screen instructions may appear after DVD. This is because the recorder is adding
, The title contained a copy protection signal, recorder and remote. Set the same
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow disc data to the disc.
so it was moved (page 79). command mode (page 127). The default
the on-screen instructions.
command mode setting for this recorder and
the supplied remote is DVD3. You can Any buttons do not function and “LOCKED”
High-speed dubbing is not possible.
Recording does not stop after you press check the current command mode in the appears in the front panel display.
, The title cannot be dubbed at high speed
x. front panel display (page 127). , The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child
(page 80). Even if A-B erasure is performed
, Press x REC STOP. , The batteries are weak. Lock (page 61, 88).
so that a title does not contain mixed picture
, The remote is too far from the recorder.
sizes, it is still treated as a title with mixed
Timer recording is not complete or did not , The remote’s manufacturer code returned to
picture sizes. The disc tray does not open and
start from the beginning. the default setting when you replaced the
batteries. Reset the code (page 21).
“TRAYLOCKED” appears in the front panel
, There was a power failure during recording. HDD/DVD Dubbing is not possible. display.
, The remote is not pointed at the remote
If the power recovers when there is a timer , The title cannot be dubbed (page 79). , Contact your Sony dealer or local
sensor on the recorder.
recording, the recorder resumes recording. authorized Sony service facility.
Should the power failure continue for more
than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 109). Display
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer
Others “REPAIR” appears in the front panel
setting (page 58). display.
The clock has stopped. The recorder does not detect a USB device
, Disc space was not sufficient. , The recorder’s repair function is activated
, Set the clock again (page 109). connected to the recorder.
, The VPS/PDC function is working. , The clock stopped due to a power failure
to repair the hard disk drive or disc when the
, Make sure that the USB device is securely recorder is turned on after a power failure
that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the connected to the recorder (page 106).
Contents previously recorded were has occurred during recorder operation,
clock (page 109). , Check if the USB device or a cable is such as while recording, or when some
erased. damaged. errors have occurred. Leave the recorder on
, Data that is not playable on this recorder but The timer indicator is flashing. , Check if the USB device is on. until “REPAIR” disappears from the front
was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be , The disc does not have enough space. panel display.
erased from the disc when the disc is , Insert a recordable disc into the recorder.
inserted.
Display language on the screen switches
, The inserted DVD is protected (page 39).
automatically. “E01” appears in the front panel display.
, When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the , There is a problem in the HDD. Contact
The VPS/PDC function does not operate. The clock does not appear in the front “HDMI Output” setup (page 126), the your nearest Sony dealer. Note that contents
, Check that the clock and date are set panel display when the recorder is turned
Additional Information
display language on the screen on the HDD may be erased when servicing
correctly.
off. automatically switches, according to the this unit.
, Check that the VPS/PDC time you set is
, “Front Panel Display” is set to “Off” in the language setting of the connected TV, if
correct (there might be a mistake in the TV
“Options” setup (page 127). you change the language settings on your “E02” appears in the front panel display.
programme guide). If the broadcast you
TV, etc.
wanted to record did not send the correct , A hard disk error has occurred and you
VPS/PDC information, the recorder will not cannot make a new recording to the HDD.
start recording. The recorder does not operate properly. Press and hold [/1 on the recorder for more
, If the reception is poor, the VPS/PDC signal , Press down [/1 on the recorder for more than five seconds to turn the recorder off,
might be altered and the recorder might not than five seconds until the recorder turns then turn it on again. If “E02” still appears,
start recording. off. Then, press [/1 again to turn on the format the HDD following the instructions
, The VPS/PDC function may not work if the recorder. of “Format HDD.” (page 108). Note that all
GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not , When static electricity, etc., causes the of the recorded contents on the HDD will be
complete. recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the erased. If this does not fix the problem,
, The VPS/PDC function does not work recorder and wait until the clock appears in contact your nearest Sony dealer.
when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being the front panel display. Then, unplug the
downloaded. recorder and after leaving it off for a while,
plug it in again.
On adjusting volume
Do not turn up the volume while listening to
a section with very low level inputs or no
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be
damaged when a peak level section is played. • Do not use solvents such as benzine,
thinner, commercially available cleaners, or
On cleaning anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a • Do not use the following discs.
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild – A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,
detergent solution. Do not use any type of card, heart).
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent – A disc with a label or sticker on it.
such as alcohol or benzine. – A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker
adhesive on it.
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens On replacement of parts
cleaners (including wet or spray types). In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired
Additional Information
These may cause the recorder to parts may be collected for reuse or recycling
malfunction. purposes.
136 137
1-33
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin
Specifications CVBS OUT Notes on MP3 Audio MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream) files, or DivX video files that
System LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin Tracks, JPEG Image the recorder can play
Laser: Semiconductor laser CVBS IN/OUT
S-Video/RGB IN
Files, and DivX Video The recorder can play the following tracks
Channel coverage:
PAL/SECAM (B/G, D/K, I, L) Decoder Files and files:
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100 – MP3 audio tracks with the extension
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10, “.mp3.”
Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/
Africa 4 to 11, 13 0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG – JPEG image files with the extension “.jpeg”
or “.jpg.”
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to COMPONENT VIDEO OUT image files, and DivX video – Baseline JPEG image files that conform to
B69, F21 to F69 (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR): files the Exif 2.2* image files format, and
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, Y:CB:CR is 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0.
B to Q PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p MP3 is an audio compression technology that – DivX video files with the extension “.avi”
G-LINK: mini jack satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations. or “.divx.”
HYPER: S21 to S41
HDMI OUT: HDMI 19-pin-Standard JPEG is an image compression technology. * “Exchangeable Image File Format”: The file
Connector You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) format used by digital still cameras.
The above channel coverage merely ensures
USB: format audio tracks and JPEG image files on
the channel reception within these ranges. It z Hint
the HDD or DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/
does not guarantee the ability to receive USB jack Type A (For connecting Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
CD-RWs) or JPEG image files on the HDD
signals in all circumstances. For details, see digital still camera, Memory card or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/ playback, it is recommended that you create albums
“Receivable channels” (page 112). reader and USB memory) with no more than two trees.
DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs).
USB jack Type B (For connecting DivX® is a video file compression
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer b Notes
PictBridge-compatible printers) technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This • The recorder will play any data with the extension
system product is an official DivX® Certified “.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or “.divx” even if
Audio reception: Split carrier system General product. You can play DATA CDs (CD- they are not in MP3, JPEG, or DivX format.
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial Power requirements: 220-240 V AC, ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) and DATA DVDs Playing these data may generate a loud noise
socket 50/60 Hz (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD- which could damage your speaker system.
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer RWs/DVD-Rs) that contain DivX video files. • Depending on the disc, normal playback may not
Power consumption: 44 W be possible. For example, the picture may be
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/ Dimensions (approx.): DATA DVDs must be recorded according to
unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the
Power back-up duration: 1 hour 430 × 66.5 × 286 mm (width/height/ ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or
sound may skip, and so on.
Video recording format: MPEG-2, UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, • Depending on the disc, playback may take some
depth) incl. projecting parts
2.00*, or 2.01 format for the recorder to time to start.
MPEG-1 Hard disk drive capacity: recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files, • Some files cannot be played.
Additional Information
Audio recording format/applicable RDR-HX750: 160 GB and DivX video files. • For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files, the
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch RDR-HX950: 250 GB DATA CDs must be recorded according to recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and Mass (approx.): 4.4 kg ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to 99 tracks and
SEP mode), PCM Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC format for the recorder to recognise the MP3 files under an album can be played.
tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video • For JPEG image files, the recorder can load up to
Operating humidity: 25% to 80% 99 albums and/or up to 999 files under an album
Inputs and outputs Supplied accessories: files.
on a DATA CD/DATA DVD or the connected
LINE 2 OUT Mains lead (1) You can also play discs recorded in USB device at a time. To view unloaded albums,
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms Aerial cable (1) MultiSession/Border. reload them.
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p See the instructions supplied with the disc • Proceeding to the next or another album may take
Remote commander (remote) (1)
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, drives and the recording software (not some time.
Set top box controller (1) supplied) for details on the recording format. • The image size that can be displayed is limited.
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL) R6 (size AA) batteries (2) The following image sizes can be displayed:
LINE 2 IN * Not available for MP3 audio tracks. width 160–5,120 pixels by height 120–3,840
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than Specifications and design are subject to pixels.
22 kilohms change without notice. Note on MultiSession/Border discs • This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz,
If audio tracks and images in Music CD
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, format or Video CD format are recorded in • No more than a 1 GB MP3 audio track can be
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL) the first session/border, only the first session/ played.
border will be played back.
138 ,continued 139
140 141
1-34
S mc / CM (search/slow/
Guide to Parts and Controls freeze frame) buttons (62, 88, 95)
DAY +/– buttons (45)
For more information, see the pages in parentheses. T TV PAUSE button (67)
U H (play) button (60, 88, 104)
Remote
X (pause) button (62, 88, 95, 104)
A HDD button (31) x (stop) button (60, 88, 94, 104)
DVD button (31) The H button has a tactile dot*.
Additional Information
GUIDE button (43)
L MENU button (60)
M INFO (information) button (43)
N O RETURN button (23)
O </M/m/,/ENTER button (23)
P / (instant replay/instant
advance) buttons (62)
Q DISPLAY button (35)
R ./> (previous/next) buttons (62,
88, 95)
PAGE +/– buttons (45)
144 145
1-35
Language Code List Country/Area Code
For details, see page 118. For details, see page 123.
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Number Area (Code) Number Area (Code)
Number Language Number Language Number Language 0118 Argentina (ar) 1325 Malaysia (my)
(code) (code) (code) 0121 Australia (au) 1324 Mexico (mx)
0120 Austria (at) 1412 Netherlands (nl)
0205 Belgium (be) 1426 New Zealand (nz)
0218 Brazil (br) 1415 Norway (no)
0301 Canada (ca) 1611 Pakistan (pk)
0312 Chile (cl) 1608 Philippines (ph)
0314 China (cn) 1620 Portugal (pt)
0411 Denmark (dk) 1821 Russia (ru)
0609 Finland (fi) 1907 Singapore (sg)
0618 France (fr) 0519 Spain (es)
0405 Germany (de) 1905 Sweden (se)
0811 Hong Kong (hk) 0308 Switzerland (ch)
0914 India (in) 2023 Taiwan (tw)
0904 Indonesia (id) 2008 Thailand (th)
0920 Italy (it) 0702 United Kingdom (gb)
1016 Japan (jp) 2119 USA (us)
1118 Korea (kr)
Additional Information
146 147
1-36E
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”.
(See page 12)
Set
Upper case
(Page 2-2)
FR-274 board,
DVD drive
FL-178 board
(Page 2-4)
(Page 2-3)
2-1
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. UPPER CASE
4 Upper case
2 Tapping screw
3 Three screws
(special front point screw)
1 Tapping screw
Hole
3 Two claws
2-2
2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION
1 Three claws
2 Four claws
6 FL-178 board
5 Two screws
(+BV3)
2-3
2-5. DVD DRIVE
ws Two screws
(+PSW3 × 6)
wd Clamp (L35)
2 Connector (10p)
(CN102) qs Screw (+P3 × 4)
(except GX350)
qk Rear panel
2-6. DC FAN
1 Two screws
(+BV3)
2 DC fan
Air flow
2-4
2-7. HARD DISK (Except GX350)
3 Screw (+BV3)
and wire clamp
2 Screw (+BV3)
1 Two screws (+BV3)
8 Hard disk
7 Two screws
6-32UNCX4(SG)
5 Harness (7pin) 6 Two screws
(power) 6-32UNCX4(SG)
4 Harness (4pin)
(data)
5 Earth plate
9 AV-114/118 board
2-5
2-9. VDC-001 BOARD (Type AS, BS only)
2 Connector (12p)
(CN202)
1 Flexible flat cable (24core)
(CN106)
2-6
2-11. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
NOTE: When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”.
(See page 12)
RD-65 board
Power supply block
VDC-001 board (Type AS, BS only)
RL-178 board
AV-114/118 board
FR-274 board
2-7
MEMO
2-8E
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM NOTE: When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”. (See page 12)
P-CONT
U601
TU_V
SWITCHING
VDC-001 BOARD JA5701 REGULATOR
TUNER
SIF XRST1
V VIDEO EXCEPT
LINE2 OUT
AERIAL L
DIGITAL
OUT RDR-GX350 (SRV-2058EK)
IN X1601 IC1601 AUDIO L
18.432MHz TU_L IC5701 SPDIF SO, SI, SCLK IC200 EV+12V D101-104
OUT EURO MSP TU_R DVD
R X101 EEPROM RECT
AUDIO R SPDIF SEL OPTICAL EV+5.8V
SDA 27.576MHz PICK-UP
SCL SI, SCLK BLOCK SW+12V
SWITCHING AC IN
PY Y W2EN+,W2EN-, SW+5V REGULATOR FU101
W3EN+,W3EN-,
COMPONENT RDR-GX350 W1EN+,W1EN-,
SW+3.3V
MSPSTAT PB
AGC CB VIDEO D0-15 OSCEN+,OSCEN- SW+1.5V
OUT IC105 LD
PR DRIVER
IC104 A0-10
SDRAM EXCEPT CS
JA402 CR IC4701 5
B,G B,G VIDEO
DECODER 7 BUFFER
R LASER
STREAM_0-7 VIOD0-VIOD7 FMO+, FMO-
41
R/C R/C FRONT
R,G,B R,G,B C MONITOR
JA501(2/2) V/Y,C
VCLK IC1001
LINE 3/DECODER SDA AV ENC/DEC RF+,RF-
L,R Y Y SCL
L,R Y PHOTO
XRESET IC4702 A, B, C, D, S1, S2, S3, S4 DETECTOR
R/C
B,G
Y
FANCTION
AV-118
IC403 BUFFER
N-LINK SDA
FAN-
22 IC401 SELECTER FAN SCL 4
Y,C DRIVE
SDA VIDEO AUDIO
IC406 SCL SELECTER
V
FAN XRESET
PY,PB,PR
AVLTH SW
20 YP,CR,,CB YP,CR,,CB
R,G,B
Y,C Y,C TDRV T+,T- TRACKING
V/Y,C COIL
JA501(1/2)
LINE 1-TV
V/Y,C IC402 FDRV F+,F- FOCUS
L,R COIL
BUFFER 4
L,R IC3101
FANCTION L,R L,R AIBD0 MDRV
AUDIO ADC XDMUTE1
N-LINK XDMUTE2 U,V,W
1 Y,C
IC501 HU+,HU-
M
V L,R L,R L,R AOD0 SPINDLE
L,R IC3201 FG TRACKING COIL DRIVE
HV+,HV-
HW+,HW-
MOTOR
5
AUDIO DAC FOCUS COIL DRIVE
SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE
H
IC104 IC3203 SLED MOTOR DRIVE
LOADING MOTOR DRIVE ST1+,ST1-,
AGC, MSPSTAT DDC SW AUDIO LPF SL1,SL2 SLED
ST2+,ST2-
M MOTOR
X101
SDA 16.9344MHz
FANCTION SCL LD LDO+,LDO- LOADING
SW 2 M MOTOR
P-CONT
FANCTL X1001 OPEN
N-LINK IC3702 24.576MHz OPEN
CLOSE
JA751 CLOSE
XRST1 XRESET
G LINK
X101
15MHz IC101
RDR-HX750 : AEP1, UK IT
6 4
RDR-HX950 : AEP1 CONTROLLER
2
IC103 MRST IC3707
IC101 VDD V+1R5_IN
IC101 VDD DET RESET IC3701 AT0DAT10-15 AT0DAT10-15
CN3801
IDE I/F
CEC, HPD
13 13
IC102
V+5V X102 IC5202 X1002
DDATA0-31
IC1201
XRESET EXCEPT
POWER FAIL 32.768KHz
DET 5V SW
27MHz
IC1221 RDR-GX350
DADRS0-12 X5502
KEY1-3
IC5204 25MHz
EV+5.8V 512Mbit x2
5V REG DDR SDRAM IC5602
MD0-15 17 TXP,TXN
IC201 AT1DAT10-15 SATA RXP,RXN HDD
MA0-11 BRIDGE
64Mbit
XRESET
UNIT
SDRAM HDATA0-15 13
J201 IC1102
8
X5101 HADRS1-22
Y 24.576MHz 64Mbit
S VIDEO C
FL-178 BOARD FLASH ROM
3 2
LINE2 IN S201,203,204,
KEY1-3 S101 IC5103 PHY D0-7 CN3802
V S207-213 POWER AT1DAT10-15 AT1DAT10-15
KEY1,2
VIDEO FUNCTION DV PHY IDE HDD
L
SWITCH S102 IC101 7 13 TXD,RXD
AUDIO L ONE TOUCH DUB 13
(MONO) EXCEPT RDR-GX350 IR REMOTE
CONTORL X5201 XRESET
R RECEIVE
AUDIO R CN104 48MHz
D212,214 USBDM2 XTAL OSC
HDD,DVD USB USBDP2 IC5801
IC201 FLDATA ATYPE
V+5USB
SEG1-16 FLCLK
GRD1-12 FL DRIVE FLSTB
CN105 USBDM1
USBDP1 JA5801
ND201 USB
VEE
BTYPE USBVFB
FLUORESCENT
DISPLAY IC5203
Q201,202
F1,F2
T201 V+12V
DC/AC CN103
TPAP,TPAN
CONVERTER DV TPBP,TPBN IC5802
FR-274 BOARD IN DDC SW
RDR-HX750/HX950
Note: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.
3-1 3-2
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
AV-114
Q509
Q510
BTOMAIN
6
B_IN
GTOMAIN G_IN TO
BUFFER 4 VDC-001 BOARD
(CN106)
U601 Q511
RTOMAIN
Q408
2
C/R_IN
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
TUNER BUFFER BUFFER
Q411
IC401 (3/5)
Q601 D420
TU_VIN RCSEL1 Y_IN
AERIAL
VIDEO OUT BUFFER 8
IN
C/R_IN
VIDEO/AUDIO SELECTOR
G_IN
B_IN
IC601 (5/5) Q410
CN302
EURO MSP
DVD C OUT 59 BUFFER
Q606 Q604 Q413 AV-118
TU_LIN RCSEL2
SIF OUT AMP 2 AIN1+ DACML 27 BUFFER
AERIAL 18 BS IN JA401
OUT Q605 87 A TUNER IN(L)
X601 5 XIN
TU_LIN
18.432MHz DACMR 26 BUFFER 86 A TUNER IN(R) Y2 OUT 36
S VIDEO
6 XOUT SDA C2 OUT 34
13
SCL 12
22 RESETQ MSPSTAT
DC01 8
V2 OUT 32 VIDEO
XRST1
Q602 LINE2 OUT
AGC AUDIO L
AGC OUT BUFFER
Q406
SDA
RDR-HX750 : AEP1, UK
SCL IC101 (1/5)
RDR-HX950 : AEP1
AUDIO R IT CONTROLLER
2Y
4
Y2 IN
7 SEP Y2 IN
AMUTE1
Q404
IC103 (1/5) Q751,752
JA751
XMUTE2 MUTE
2C C2 IN IC101 VDD IC101 VDD DET BLAIR 45 SW
1 9 SEP C2 IN G LINK
Q407
7 BOUT MRST
B_OUT BUFFER 65 29
JA501 (1/2) 44 Pb(Cb)/B OUT CSYNCIN
MRST
16 BLANKING_OUT RGBOUT Q402 XRST1
SYNC 41 XRST 29 30
LINE1-TV DAM_TO_T
10 N-LINK 54 RGB M OUT Q403 Q110-112 31
BUFFER TEXTVIN DAM_TO_T 99
8 HSM_TO_T
FUNCTION_SW_OUT 81 CVBSIN 6 32
BUFFER EQ HSM_TO_T
6 AV1_L_IN DAT_TO_M
L_IN 98 33
94 A L1 IN(L) DAT_TO_M
2 AV1_R_IN ASCK
IC104 (1/5)
R_IN 34 TO/FROM
93 A L1 IN(R) 59 EPGEQ ASCK 100 RD-065 BOARD
3 AV1_L_OUT HST_TO_M
L_OUT SDA 42 79 35 (CN2301(2/2))
74 A AV1/OUT(L) DDC SW HST_TO_M
1 AV1_R_OUT DDC_SW1
R_OUT SCL 43 DDC_SW1 37 39 (SEE PAGE 3-5)
1 73 A AV1/OUT(R) HPD
14 40
12 SDA HOTPLUG 73
Q506 Q508 27 DSDA
13 36
SAMUTE 28 SCL DSCL
SAMUTE 38
11 69 CEC0 CEC
9 37
38 DDC_SW2 AMUTE1
10 23
Q505
X525P
AVLOUT 5 Q103-105 1
SW 47 XSCMUTE
7
6 SAMUTE SAMUTE 58 MUTECTL
Q503,504 1 AMUTE1 TXD1
CONTROL
AVLIN TXD1 75 3
SW RXD1
RXD1 76 4
RESET CN103
V+5R8E 6
DBGP0 FOR CHECK
Q501,502 Q101 DBGP0
FUNC_ON 92 7
DBGP1
FUNCTION RESET 8 RESET DBGP1 91 8
SW SQU DBGP2
DBGP2 90 9
3-3 3-4
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
RD-065 BOARD
CN3801 24,26,28,30, V14,U11,U12,W15,
EXCEPT RDR-GX350
DVD AT0D00
EXCEPT CS IC1001 (2/7,4/7 to 7/7 ) OPTICAL
IDE I/F
32,34,36,38,
37,35,33,31,
AT0DATA0-15
V11,T12,P13,R15,
R13,V10,P15,U13,
|
17,15,13,11,
PICK-UP AT0D015
AV ENC/DEC BLOCK 29,27,25,23 R14,U15,W13,T14 9,7,5,3,
AT1DATA0-15 DD0-15
4,6,8,10,
AT0DA0
CN4701 IC4701 (2/7) PKPULSEP1P,
PKPULSEP1M
AH2, AH1
W2EN+. W2EN-
2 27, 28
6,
8,
AT0ADR0-2
W14
U10 |
12,14,16,18
AF24,AE24, W3EN+, W3EN- AT0CS0 3 U14 AT0DA2
5 35,
8 9 12 AE21,AD24, VIOD0 PKPULSEP2P, AJ4, AJ3 29, 30 AT1ADR0-2 DA0-2
CN3802
STREAM0-7 | PKPULSEP2M 2 AT0CS1 33,
| | | VIOD0-7 AF23,AD23, W1EN+, W1EN- LD AT0CS0B 3
8 8 4 AT0DMARQ W12 AT1CS0 CS0# 36
15 2 18 AC24,AC22 VIOD7 WRPULSEP, AH4, AH3 31, 32 DRIVER AT0CS1B IDE HDD
WRPULSEM 2 3 AT0DIOW W11 AT1CS1 CS1#
OSCEN+, OSCEN- 20 AT0DIOR T15 AT0DMARQ AT1DMARQ DMRQ 37
HFONP,HFONM AH5, AJ5 33, 34 AT0DIOWB
2 18 AT0RESET P14 AT1DIOW DIOW# 38
VCLKI 1 IC4702 (2/7) PB4 AE6
LDDEN
35 16 6 R12 AT0DIORB AT1DIOR DIOR# 21
4 W3SET 40 AT0IORDY V13 AT0RESETB AT1RESET RESET# 23
17 AB20 VIOCLK PLED AE11 36
2 AT0DMACK 6 25
W2SET
P2LD AF11 37 14 AT0INTRQ T13 AT0IORDY AT1IORDY IORDY 1
W1SET 12 V15 AT0DMACKB AT1DMACK DMACK#
WLD AE9 38 3
10 V12 AT0INTRQ AT1INTRQ INTRQ 27
IC4703 (2/7) APCV RSET
RLD AF8 39 3 29
FMO+, FMO- LASER 31
FPDVI, PDIN AGP, AG8 17, 18 FRONT B3, A3, DBA0, DBA1,
DVD/CD 2 PDIAG#
ADATA 20 MONITOR C1, B1, DCLKO, DCLKNO,
5 5 6 AB22 AIOBD PA3 AG6 DASPn 34 34
TO/FROM HFGAIN C2, B2, DWEB, DCASB, DASP#
ABCKI 21
VDC-001 BOARD 4 9 8 AA20 AIOBCK PB3 AG1 A2, C3, DRASB, DCS0B, PDIAGn 46 39
(CN104) ALRCKI OSCNT 17 D5, DCKE,
6 2 3 AE20 AIOLRCK PB5 AF6 24
DDQM0, DDQM2,
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
RFP, RFN AH12, AJ12
RF+, RF-
2
9, 7 DBA0, DBA1 IC1201,1221 (4/7) F3, J1,
F2, J2, DDQS0, DDQS2, AT1D00
M4,R1,R4,R2, 62,64,2,5
DD0
TXP 32 2
TXI DCLKO, DCLKNO
23
RXI
AF21 TXD0B AJ11,AJ10,
A, B, C, D
14, 11,
M3,M4,M1,M2
PHOTO DWE 512Mbit X 2 DDR SDRAM A5, B9, DDQM1, DDQM3,
DDQS1, DDQS3
| N5,R3,P4,T1,
T2,P5,T3,R5,
AT1DATA0-15
7,11,13,15
14,12,10,6 | TXN 31 3 HDD
A1,B1,C1,D1 4 12, 13
C6, C9 AT1D015 DD5
AJ9,AJ8 DCAS
22
SDA_VDEC
AF22 RXD0B
S1, S2, S3, S4
DETECTOR
DRAS
U1,N4,U2,W1 3,1,63,61 RXN 28 5 UNIT
26 L19 SDA0 AH9,AH8, 3, 4, (IC1201) AT1DA0 U3 50 RXP 27 6
SCL_VDEC G1,H1,F1,E1 DCS0B F5,F4,G5,G4,J4,J5,H4,H5, DQ00 AT1ADR0-2 DA0
25 AH10,AH11 4 5, 2 DCKE 2,4,5,7,8,10, | W2 51 |
AT/XDT
M19 SCL0
AG4
SW1 DDM0, DDM2
26, 27
45, 46
BA0, BA1
CK, /CK
DQ0
|
11,13,54,56, DDATA0-7,16-23 A8,B8,C8,A7,B6,A6,C7,B7, |
G1,G2,G3,F1,H3,H2,H1,J3, DQ31
AT1DA2 T5 3 AT1CS0 3 49 DA2 IC5602 CN5604
28 T19 GPIO6 PB0 1 (IC1201) 57,59,60,62, DDATA8-15,24-31
SPDIF_LL SW2 DDQS0, DDQS2 21 /WE DQ15 D9,E9,D8,E8,D7,E7,D6,E6 AT1CS1 SATA BRIDGE
2 SDA1 PB1 AE7 15 DDM1, DDM3 22 63,65 (IC1221) AT1CS0B T4 AT1DMARQ 48 CS0n
C18 /CAS X5502
XRESET TEMP
20 D17 SCL1 RFP3 AJ23
LCDS
40
SEN
(IC1221) DDQS1, DDQS3 23
24
/RAS
CS
AT1CS1B
AT1DMARQ
V3
V5
AT1DIOW
AT1DIOR
47
60
CS1n
DMARQ
(5/7) 25MHz
PA2 AH7 44 44 CKE AT1DIOWB U5 AT1RESET 59 DIOWn
CN2301 Q3301, 3302 SI SDIO 29-32, B4,A4,C5,B5, DADD00 XTALI 22
20, 47 LDM, HDM A0 AT1DIORB V1 58 DIORn
45 35-40, DADRS0-12 E1,E2,D1,D2, | 6 6
29 Y EQ E24 SCLK SCLK 16, 51 LDQS, UDQS | AT1RESETB V4 AT1IORDY 16 RESETn
46 A12 28,41,42 D3,E4,C4,D4,E5 DADD12 AT1DMACK XTALO 23
Q3303, 3304 VPPD VREFPD U4 AT1INTRQ 55 IORDY
VREFIO AF10 10 AT1IORDY
C/R_IN XRESET RESET AT1DMACKB V2 54 DMACKn XRESET
27 ACI D101 3 3 PORn 17
C/R EQ G24 42 AT1INTRQ M5 53 INTRQ
Q3305, 3306 PA1 AJ6 VA5V
G_IN V+5L 6, 16 AA2 LDQM TXD2_BRIDGE
25 ABI VD3V TXD2B AJ24 43 UAI
G EQ
CS, DS Q3307, 3308
D23 V+3A
T+
41
TR
AB2
AD5
UDQM
MBA RXD2B AH23
RXD2_BRIDGE
45 UAO
B_IN TRACKING ACO1+ 54 48 TRACKING AF2 WEB L5201
23 B EQ F23 ARI TDRV AH20 4 ACTIN1 T- TD 8 USB_DN0 USBDM2
COIL DRIVE AE2 CASB 10
ACO1- 53
F+
47
FR
COIL
IC201 (4/7) AF4 RASB
USB_DN0 M1
USB_DP0 USBDP2 8
Q2501 FOCUS ACO2+ 52 50 FOCUS AB4 MCLKOUT USB_DP0 M2
AH21 5 ACTIN2 F- FD 64Mbit SDRAM USB_D_CONEECT
39
YP_OUT
BUFFER A20 VAB
FDRV COIL DRIVE
ACO2- 51 49 COIL
LDQM
AC4 MCKE USB_D_CONEECT P3
USB_D_DN0
IC5203 (6/7) L5202
USBDM1
TO/FROM
FL-178 BOARD
USB_D_DN0 P1 3
CN101 UDQM (CN102)
USB_D_DP0 USBDP1
Y_OUT Q2501 IC501 MBA
2,4,5,7,8,10, Y3,AA4,AB1,AA5, MD0
USB_D_DP0 P2 1 (SEE PAGE 3-7)
33 BUFFER A20 VAY WEZ 15 LDQM DQ0 AB3,AA3,W4,Y4,
11,13,42,44, |
Q2502 REF16 AF9 42 VC (7/7) SPINDLE
MOTOR
CASZ
RASZ
39 UDQM | 45,47,48,50,
MD0-15 W5,W3,Y5,Y2, MD15 USB_D_VBUS N3
USB_D_VBUS 4
1
USBVFB 5
C_OUT U 20 BA0 DQ15 AC2,AB5,AA1,Y1 2
31 BUFFER B21 VAC 51,53 X5201 V+5USB
U 11 4 MCLK 16 /WE 6
V MCKE USB_CLKI
TO/FROM
15
LCHIN
2 AINL SDTO 9
AIBD0
AIBD0
V 13 3
W M 17
18
/CAS
/RAS
4 USB_CLKI N1
48MHz
XTAL OSC IC5202 (6/7) CN5201
AV-114/118 BOARD
(CN1101(1/2)) 17
RCHIN
1 AINR
IC3101 LRCK 10
AILRCK0
E20
AILRCK0 MDRV
W 16 2
VCC
38
37
CLK
CKE
A0 23-26, AE3,AD3,AF3,AE5, MA0
USB_H_PPON0
5V SW
F19 AJ22 26 SPIN V+5M 12 10 V+3D | 29-34, MA0-11 AE4,AD2,AD1,AC5, | USB_H_PPON0 N2 5V
(SEE PAGE 3-4) AUDIO ADC ADCCLKO XDMUTE1 HU+ EV+5.8V 4 5 5
MCLK 11 AIOMCK0 RFP1 PW A11 22,35 AD4,AC1,AC3 MA11 USB_H_OCI0 REG 4
C20 AG21 34 CTL1 HU+ 20 11 MD2
(3/7) SCLK 12
AIBCK0
E19 AIBCK0 RFP2 AH22
XDMUTE2
35 CTL2 SPINDLE HU- 21 10
HU-
1
3
D5(AG) MD5
USB_H_OCI0 M3
FLG 3
ADPOW MOTOR D1(SL) MD1
HV+ 4 1
PON 13 GPIO37 D0(MA)
U19 FG AG20 43 FG DRIVE HV+ 22 9
HV- H CN201
5
4
MD0 IC5204 (6/7)
HV- 23 8 TX_FE REMO
FOR CHECK 8 AF7 PB7
HW+
IC3203 (3/7) IC3201 (3/7) HW+ 24 7
HW- 9
RX_FE REMI
AG5 PB6
AUDIO LPF AUDIO DAC HW- 25 6 XRESET
5 HB 7 V24 FCSB0
2 AOD0 HB 19 A9(ATA)
L_OUT _ 7 VOUTL DATA 2 E18 AOD0 2 3 W22 FOEB
21 AOBCK CN501 AA24 FWEB PHY_D0 E13,D13,E12, 8,9,11, D0 TPAP
1
+ 3
BCKIN 1
AOLRCK
C19 AOBCK IC1102 (4/7) | D12,E11,D11, PHY_D0-7 12,14,15, | TPA0p 39
TPAN
1
TO/FROM
6 ST1+ PHY_D7 E10,D10 17,18 D7 2 FL-178 BOARD
R_OUT _ 8 VOUTR LRCKIN 3 D20 AOLRCK SLO1+ 40 1 TPA0n 38
19 DACCLKO SL1 64Mbit FLASH ROM PHYCTL0 TPBP (CN101)
+ 5 SLED ST1- TPB0p 37 5
7 MCLK 16 E21 AIOMCK1 SDRV1 AJ21 29 SL1IN SLO1- 39 2 CTL0 E14 5 CTL0
18
AMUTE1
11 ZEROR
MD 13
SMDOUT
SMCKOUT
L4 SMDOUT SDRV2 AJ20
SL2
30 SL2IN
MOTOR
DRIVE SLO2+ 38
ST2+
ST2-
4 M SLED
MOTOR HCS0 CTL1 D14
PHYCTL1
PHYSCLK
6 CTL1 IC5103 TPB0n 36
TPBN
6
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
HDOE 29,31,33,35, W21,Y21,AA21,U23, RDATA00 SCLK D15 2 SCLK
MC 14 K5 SMCKOUT SLO2- 37 3 26 CE DV PHY CN5101
NSCS HWS0 DQ0 38,40,42,44, V22,T24,U24,N23,R23, | PHYLREQ
CN502 28 OE HDATA0-15 LREQ E15 63 LREQ X0 22
ML 15 L3 GPIO62 | 30,32,34,36, M22,T22,T21,P21,N22, RDATA015
11 WE PHYLPS
D3201
AMUTE LD
LOADING
LDO+
LDO+ RED DQ15 39,41,43,45 N20,R21 LPS D16
PHYLINKON
59 LPS (6/7) X5101
2 1 24.576MHz
10
DAM_TO_T SMDOUT
F17 GPIO54 DAOUT AJ19 46 LDIN MOTOR
DRIVE LDO- 1
LDO-
2
BLACK M LOADING
MOTOR
Y20,Y24,AA22,W23,
LINKON
GPIO52
E16
F20
PHY_XRST
58
55
LKON
RESETB
X1 23
(3/7)
Note: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.
3-5 3-6
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
FR-274 BOARD
EXCEPT RDR-GX350
Q206
Q205
IC201
FL DRIVER SEG1
|
SG1 14 SEG16
| |
SG16 29 16
FLDATA
GRD1 AS,BS Tape only
12 |
7 DIN GR1 42
FLCLK GRD12
11 8 CLK | |
10
FLSTB
9 STB
GR12
VEE
31
30
12
VDC-001 BOARD
ND201
T201 FLUORESCENT
Q203,204 DC/AC CONVERTER DISPLAY
Q105,109
TRASFORMER B_IN ROY2 97-94, 8
V+12RIE
D208-211 19 LPF 164 ABI | 91,90, STREAM_0-7 |
ROY9 87,86 15
2 10 Q104,108
G_IN
FLPON FROM 21 160 AGI
17 LPF
1 AV-114 BOARD
3
F2 (CN302) VCLK
7 Q102,106 ROCK 101 17
Q201,202 (SEE PAGE 3-4) C/R_IN
23 172 ARI TO/FROM
LPF
DC/AC 4 RD-065 BOARD
CONVERTER (CN4701)
8 Q103,107
5 Y_IN (SEE PAGE 3-5)
17 148 AVI
LPF
F1
TO/FROM 9 CN106
AV-114/118 BOARD 6 XRESET
RSTB 74 20
(CN105) 158 ASCI SDA_VDEC
SDA 72 26
(SEE PAGE 3-4) SCL_VDEC
SCL 71 25
CN104
54 XO
KEY2 KEY2
2 5 1 S102 ONE TOCH DUB
16
IR
3 3
IR IC101
CN203 CN201 CN106 REMOTE CONTROL IC105 A0 21-24, 19,18, SDRA0
RECEIVER | 27-32, SDRA0-10 15-12, |
S201,213,212 SDRAM A9 19 10-6,4 SDRA10
OPEN/CLOSE, RDR-HX750 / HX950
HDD, 1
DVD
USBDM2 2 CN104 A10/AP 20 4 SDRABP
7 XWE SDRWE
3 15 29
S203,204,207 USBDP2 USB XCAS SDRCAS
9 16 28
4 ATYPE XRAS SDRRAS
USBDM1 17 22
REC STOP, TO/FROM 3 XCS SDRCS
18 7 20
INPUT SELECT, RD-065 BOARD USBDP1 CLK SDRCLK
1 35 25
REC (CN5201) CKE
USBVFB 34 21 SDRCKE
(SEE PAGE 3-6) 6
5 V+5USB
S208-211
CN102 CN105
CH+, CH-,
PLAY, 2 1
USB
STOP BTYPE
3 4
FL102
TPAP TPA+ 4
2
TO/FROM TPAN TPA- 3 CN103
1
RD-065 BOARD FL101 2
(CN5101) TPBP TPB+ DV
5
1 IN
(SEE PAGE 3-6) TPBN TPB-
6
CN101
J201
3 2Y
S VIDEO 4
4 2C
1
5 SDET2 2
LINE2 IN TO/FROM
2V AV-114/118 BOARD
7 (CN106)
VIDEO 6
(SEE PAGE 3-3)
AUDIO L 9 2L
(MONO) 8
11 2R
AUDIO R 10
CN202
3-7 3-8
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SWITCHING
3
IC202 EXCEPT RDR-GX350 3
+
8
1 VREF_D
P204 2
REGULATOR SHUNT REG EV+5.8V(M) EV+5.8V EV+5.8V _
1 1
Q501 SW+1.5V(M) SW+1.53V V+1R5_IN
D501 L501 P501 3,4 3,4
2 6 SW+3.3V SW+3.3V(M) SW+3.33V V+3D CN103
D105 3.3V REG 6,7 6,7 14
FOR CHECK
4 P402 SW+12V V+12V V+12V
9 9 IC4502
SW+5V(W) V+5M V+5M
D502 11 11 1 CN1401
SW+12V(W) V12M V12M FOR CHECK
13 13
CN4501 IC4501 V+2R5
IC501 CN201
CN2301
P_CONT2
IC4541 (1/7)
CN105 CN302 CN301 3V REG
IC4701-4703 IC3701 IC3702
SW+1.5V CN106 (AV-114) (AV-118) D103
EV+12V
11,12
EV+12.1V EV+12.1V V+12R1
V+5V
EV5.8V
7 VIN VO 1
V+3A (2/7) (3/7) (3/7)
9 9 16 2
EV+5.8V EV+5.8V V+5R8E D104 BUFFER BUFFER AND GATE
CONT
SW+3.3V
6,7 5,7 20,18 4
V+12R1E C118
(1/5) 5
2,4
P-CONT P-CONT P-CONT BACK-UP P_CONT P_CONT2
1 4 21 1 62 IC101 RDR-HX750 / HX950
P-CONT2 P-CONT2 P_CONT2 IC3201 IC3202 IC3101
FAN
12 13
FANCTL
57 IT CONTROLLER IC4552 (1/7)
1
EV+12V CN201
(AV-118)
RFTHRU
54
CN104
5V REG (3/7) (3/7) (3/7)
FAN- 52 EV5.8V V+5L AUDIO DAC AUDIO LPF AUDIO ADC
FAN- FAN- Q201 FANCTL TUON 4 VIN VOUT 5
2 2 2 USB
23 FAN DRIVE 60
SWVION9V ATYPE ON/OFF V+3D
CN103 Q301,302
(3/5) SWVION5V
61
1 L4551 V+5AO
IC105 V+5BB TU_DCCON
64 1
P_CONT2
V+3.3D
IC403 74 V+5A IN
SDRAM
RFTHRU RCSEL
FLPON
63 FL-178 IC4561 (1/7)
5V REG
V+5D
V+12VA
5
CN1402
FOR CHECK
Q305,306
IC101
3.3V REG
V+3.3D
R307
R308
V+5VD
(3/5) BOARD EV5.8V
1 VIN VOUT 5
V+5HD
18 JA5801
P_CONT2
DECODER
TUON REMOTE
V+5USB
IC4562 (1/7) (6/7)
V+5F COMMANDER 3V REG
RECEIVER 5
IC102 Q307,308 V+9V EV5.8V V+3HD IC5802
1.5V REG 9V REG U601 (1/5) CN102 1 VIN VOUT 5
V+1.5V
CONT (6/7)
7 VIN VO 1
SWVION9V TUNER IC103 CN106 3
CONT IC317 Q309-311 V+32V IC101 VDD DET
5 IC5701
5 DC/DC CONV.
P_CONT2 TU_DDCON
1 IC4571 (1/7) EXCEPT L5601 V+3DS (3/7)
IC103 (5/5) (1/5)
CN201
FR-274 BOARD V+3D
1.8V REG
V+1R8
RDR-GX350 EMI
IC5602 SPDIF SELECT
5 VIN VOUT 1
(5/7) EXCEPT RDR-GX350
5V REG 14 IC601 IC104 ON/OFF
5V SATA BRIDGE
1 VIN VOUT 5 Q102-1109 EURO MSP 4
DDC SW
CONT
LPF
V+5F IC201 VEE IC5203
3 4 14 L5101
FL DRIVE Q4581 V+3V_A
P_CONT2
(3/5) V+12V RIPPLE V+12VA
IC5103 (6/7)
(4/5) D208-211
FILTER L5122 V+3V_D (6/7) AND GATE
IC402 RECT EMI
DV PHY
BUFFER IC406 IC5204 (6/7) IC5202 (6/7)
AVLTH SW 5V REG 5V SW
Q203,204 V+5USB
Q201,202 EV5.8V 5V
V+12RIE T201 4 VIN VOUT 5 4 5 6
3 15 F1,F2
DC/AC USB_H_OCI0 CN5201
IC150 NC FLG 3
CONVERTER
FLPON 3
1 17 1
V+3D
CN105 CN203 USB_H_PPON0
ND201 RDR-HX750 / HX950
FLUORESCENT
DISPLAY
Note: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.
3-9 3-10
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
MEMO
3-12E
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SECTION 4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM NOTE: When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”. (See page 12)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EXCEPT RDR-GX350
A
CN201 13P 4P
EV+5.8V(M ) 1 5V
4
GND
GND 2 3
SW+1.5V(M ) 3 PH-080 2
GND
12V
SW+1.5V(M ) 4
HARNESS 1
GND D 5 DVD-UNIT
SW+3.3V(M ) 6
SW+3.3V(M ) 7
GND
SW+12V
8
9 1
7P
GND
HDD UNIT
CN101 50P 50P
GND(J) 10 2 HT+
FR 50 50 FR
SW+5V(W ) 11 3 HT-
FD 49 49 FD
GND(W) 12 4 GND
TR 48 48 TR
SW+12V(W) 13 5 HA-
TD 47 47 TD
6 HA+
SCLK 46 46 SCLK
7 GND
SDIO 45 45 SDI O
B CN202 12P
COMPONENT
SEN
VPP
44
43
44
43
SEN
VPP
LINE 2 OUT G-LINK
POWER P_ON/OF F
SW+3.3V(T )
1
2
VIDEO OUT RESET
VD3V
42
41
42
41
RESET
VD3V
BLOCK
GND
SW+3.3V(T )
3
4
RH-059 TEM P 40 40 TEM P
TUNER
GND 5
SWITCHING W1SET 38 38 W1SET
( REGULATOR ) EV+5.8V(T )
EV+5.8V(T )
GND
6
8
W2SET
W3SET
37
36
37
36
W2SET
W3SET
7
LDDEN 35 35 LDDEN
EV+12V 9
GN D
TX N
GN D
RX N
GN D
RXP
TXP
OSCEN- 34 34 OSCEN-
GND 10
OSCEN+ 33 33 OSCEN+
SW+1.5V(T ) 11
CN2301 40P C N101 40P
W1EN- 32 32 W1EN-
SW+1.5V(T ) 12 X 525P 40 40 HPD
W1EN+ 31 31 W1EN+
YP_OUT 39 39 DDC_SW 1
W3EN- 30 30 W3EN-
CN5604 7P GND
CR_OUT
38
37
FRA-006 38
37
DSCL
CEC
W3EN+ 29 29 W3EN+
C GND
Y_OUT
34
33
34
33
ASCK
DAT_TO_M
VO5V
VO5V
26
25
26
25
VO5V
VO5V
OSCNT 24 24 OSCNT
GND 32 32 HSM_TO_T
GNDO 23 23 GNDO
CN4501 13P C_OUT 31 31 DAM_TO_T
GNDO 22 22 GNDO
1 EV+5.8 V GND 30 30 XRST1
HFGAIN 21 21 HFGAIN
2 GND D Y_I N 29 29 MRST
DVD/CD 20 20 DVD/CD
3 SW+1.53V GND 28 28 P_CONT2
GNDA 19 19 GNDA
CN203 4P 4 SW+1.53V C/R_IN 27 27 GN D
FMO- 18 18 FMO-
SW+5V(H)
4 5 GND D GND 26 26 L_IN
FMO+ 17 17 FMO+
GND
3 6 SW+3.33V G_I N 25 25 GN D
VA5V 16 16 VA5V
RD-065 BOARD
GND
2 7 SW+3.33V GND 24 24 R_IN
SW2 15 15 SW2
SW+12.1V(H) 1 8 GND D B_IN 23 23 AMUTE1
M3 14 14 M3
9 V +12V GND 22 22 R_OUT
M2 13 13 M2
10 GND L_OUT 21 21 GNDA
M1 12 12 M1
11 V+5M GNDA 20 20 L_OUT
M4 11 11 M4
12 GND M R_OUT 19 19 GN D
PR-076 R_IN 17 17 GN D
RF+ 9 9 RF+
D HARNESS GND
L_IN
16
15
16
15
G_I N
GN D
AV-118 BOARD GNDA
RF-
8
7
8
7
GNDA
RF-
VA5V 6 6 VA5V
CN5201 10P GND 14 14 C/R_I N
S3 5 5 S3
10 USBDM2 P_CONT2 13 13 GN D
S2 4 4 S2
9 GND MRST 12 12 Y_I N
S1 3 3 S1
8 USBDP2 XRST1 11 11 GN D
S4 2 2 S4
EXCEPT 7 GND DAM_TO_T 10 10 C_OUT
SW1 1 1 SW1
RDR-GX350 6 V+5USB HSM_TO_T 9 9 GN D
4 GND ASCK 7 7 GN D
2 GND DSDA 5 5 GN D
(AS BS) CN502 4P 4P
1 USBDP1 CEC 4 4 CR_OUT
ST2+ 4 4 ST2+
CN5101 6P CN4701 28P DSCL 3 3 GN D
ST2- 3 3 ST2-
DDC_SW 1 2 2 YP_OUT
ST1- 2 2 ST1-
HD P 1 1 X525P
ST1+ 1 1 ST1+
GND(RFE/XLL)
A_GN D
A_GN D
TPB P
TPB N
TPAP
TPAN
STREAM_7
STREAM_6
STREAM_5
STREAM_4
STREAM_3
STREAM_2
STREAM_1
STREAM_0
SDA_VDEC
SCL_VDEC
AT/XD T
XRESET
ALRCKI
ADATA
SPDIF
VCLKI
ABCKI
GN D
GN D
GN D
GN D
RX 1
TX 1
GND
GND
GND
GND
E
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
6
CN601 5P 5P
FVR-001 LPS2 5 5 LPS2
FLEXIBLE GNDD 4 4 GNDD
FLAT CABLE LPS1 3 3 LPS1
BLACK 2 2 BLACK
RED 1 1 RED
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
GN D
GN D
GN D
GN D
GN D
GN D
GN D
GN D
STREAM_ 7
STREAM_ 6
STREAM_ 5
STREAM_ 4
STREAM_ 3
STREAM_ 2
STREAM_ 1
STREAM_ 0
GND
SCL_VDE C
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
VCLK
XRESET
SDA_VDEC
HU -
11
10
11
10
HU+
HU -
1 P_CONT G_I N 21 FLEXIBLE 4 G_I N
HV+ 9 9 HV+
2 SW+3.3V GND 20 FLAT CABLE 5 GN D
HV - 8 8 HV -
3 GN D B_IN 19 6 B_IN
HW + 7 7 HW +
F 4
5
SW+3.3V
GN D
GND
Y_I N
18
17
7
8
GN D
Y_I N
HW -
HB
6
5
6
5
HW -
HB
6 V+5.8E GND 16 9 GN D
U 4 4 U
7 V+5.8E NC 15 10 DT_TUO N
V 3 3 V
8 GN D NC 14 11 ANT5V_SW
PV-145 10
9 EV+12.1V
GN D
VDC-001 BOARD P-CONT2
NC 13
12
12
13
DET_ANT
P_CONT2
GNDD
W 2
1
2
1
W
GNDD
HARNESS
11 SW+1.5V NC 11 14 V +32V
12 SW+1.5V GND 10 15 GN D
CN103
EV+12V 9 16 EV+12.1V
AV-118 BOARD
DV IN GND 8 17 GN D
CN201 2P
EV+5.8V 7 18 EV+5.8V
FAN+ 1
GND 6 19 GN D
FAN– 2
EV+5.8V 5 20 EV+5.8V
CN301 5P CN106 11P CN105 17P
P-CONT 4 21 P_CONT
CN105 3 22 GN D
GND
CN03 2P
EV+5.8V
P_CONT
FAN
LED_HDD2
LED_D_TV
LED_PLTV
USB B TYPE
LED_A_TV
LED_DIVX
1 24 GN D
V+12R1E
GND
FLPO N
FLDATA
SDET2
FLSTB
GND
FLCLK
V +5F
GND
RDR-HX750/HX950
KEY3
KEY2
KEY1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
FAN+
FAN–
G
2R
2C
2V
2V
2L
IR
ONLY
10
11
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
10
11
9
1
9
10
GN D
GN D
GN D
USBDM 2
SDET 2
GND
2R
GND
USBVF B
2C
2Y
2V
2L
IR
USBDP1
USBDP2
USBDM1
V +5F
FLST B
TPBP
PLT V
V+5USB
FLPO N
TPAP
DITV
V+12RIE
GND
GND
GND
GND
TPBN
HDD2
D_TV
TPAN
KEY3
KEY2
KEY1
A_TV
FLCLK
CN106 5P
FLDATA
CN201 5P
GND
GND
GND
GND
KEY2 1 5 KEY2
KEY1 2
FLR-010 4 KEY1 J201
IR 3 3 IR
FLEXIBLE LINE 2 IN
GND 4 2 GND
CN102 10P CN101 6P FLAT CABLE CN202 11P CN203 17P
FL-178 BOARD
V +5F 5 1 V +5F
FR-274 BOARD
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AV-114/118 BOARD VDC-001 BOARD
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards) 1 X101 7 JA402 COMPONENT PR 1 X101 (TP1125)
• : Uses unleaded solder. • Chip parts.
• : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. Transistor Diode
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) C 6 5 4 4 5 6 5 4 4 5 3 3 3 1 23
• Through hole is omitted.
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram
isn’t mounted in this model. B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 6 54
• C : panel designation 1 2 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 3 4
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF. 66.6 ns
5.1 Vp-p
H 1.0 Vp-p
40.7 ns
3.2 Vp-p
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and 5 4 3 3 4 5 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
tantalums. 6 4 3
5 4
• All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1 /10 W) un-less 2 X102 8 JA402 COMPONENT Y
otherwise specified.
kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ. 1 3 1 1 2
3
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, be-
cause it is damaged by the heat.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, 1.6 Vp-p
H
unless otherwise noted.
30.5 µs 5.1 Vp-p
• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 5 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• f : internal component 3 JA401 S-VIDEO C 9 JA501 ql
• C : adjustment for repair
• G : IN/OUT direction of (+/–) B line
• U : B+ Line
• V : B– Line
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
• Voltages are dc between measurement point and ground.
1.4 Vp-p
• Readings are taken with a color-bar signals on DVD reference H
2.0 Vp-p
disc. H
• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MΩ).
• Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production toler-
ances.
• Abbreviation 4 JA401 S-VIDEO Y 0 X601
AUS : Australian model
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
2.0 Vp-p
H
6 JA402 COMPONENT PB
1.1 Vp-p
H
WAVEFORMS
AV-114/118 VDC-001 4-3 4-4
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Q103 Q104
UMD2N-TR UMD2N-TR
D106 SA MUTE CONTROL SA MUTE CONTROL
1SS355TE-17
AV-114/118 BOARD(1/5) B+ JL20 8 JL213
A IT CONTROLLER, IR
R147
JL216 1k JL21 7 Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
B+
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- 5.4 4 1
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
R169 2.4 0
10k
Q108 JL209
5
0
3 6
4.9 Replace only with part number specified.
DTC124EUA-T106 5
2 2
BLANK 5.3 0
C135
3 6
5.0 0.1 0 0
C 127 4 1
D108 100 2.5 0.7
MC2846-TP-1 16V
JL21 0
JL27 4 Q105
2SD2114KT146
BLANK
0 0 MUTE CONTROL
SAMUTE
AMUTE1
RESE T
RXD1
TU_DCCON
HOTPLUG
MSPSTAT
TXD1
CSYNCIN
AVLIN
CEC0
P_CONT2
RFTHRU
HST_TO_M
B+
TUON
FLPON
P_CONT
FANCTL
SWVION5V
SWVION9V
EPGEQ
+5V
B L2_RIN
L2_LIN
L2_RIN
L2_LIN
2VIN B+
2VIN CN105 17P
Y2IN Y2IN
C2IN B+ KEY3 JL22 2
C2IN 17 KEY3
R_IN
R_IN KEY2 JL22 3
L_IN L_IN
R_OUT 16 KEY2
R174 100k
R_OUT KEY1 JL22 4
0.1
0.1
R172 100
R171 100
R168 180
R199 100
R167 100
R160 100
R155 100
R154 100
R153 100
R125 100
L_OUT L_OUT
0
R150 R149 15 KEY1
R175
R151 0
Y_IN
330
Y_IN 0 0 LED_PLT V JL22 5
C_OUT
R165
R159
C132
1 C_OUT
Y_OUT C 134
14 LED_PLTV
Y_OUT LED_DIVX JL22 6
CB_OUT 0.1
TO (3/5) CB_OUT R156 13 LED_DIVX
0.1
LED_A_TV
JL11 2
P_SAVE
R173 100k
P_SAVE CSYNCIN R103 11 LED_A_TV
100 TO FR-274
JL14 0
JL14 1
JL14 4
JL14 6
JL15 1
JL15 7
JL15 9
JL16 1
JL16 4
JL16 5
JL16 7
JL16 9
JL17 1
JL17 3
JL22 9
JL111
JL132
JL135
JL138
JL177
JL179
JL181
JL183
CSYNCIN SCL FLCLK LED_HDD2
C131
SCL 10 LED_HDD2 BOARD
SDA B+ CN203
SDA RCSEL1
RCSEL1 RCSEL2 9 GND THROUGH THE
RCSEL2 FLSTB JL23 0 FAR-007 FFC
4.9
4.9
3.1
5.0
4.9
3.6
4.8
4.9
4.9
4.9
4.8
4.9
4.9
4.9
4.8
4.9
2.7
4.9
4.9
BLANK
BLANK
0
XAMUTE2 8 FLSTB
XAMUTE2 FLCLK JL23 1
C AMUTE1
AMUTE1
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
FLDATA JL23 2
7 FLCL K (SEE PAGE 4-20)
RXD2
RXD1
TU_DCCON
HOTPLUG
BLANK
XCHECKER
MRST
FLON
TUON
MUTECTL
VDD2
RFTHRU
CEC
FANCTL
EPGEQ
TXD2
TXD1
FLCLK
P_CONT
P_CONT2
VDDDDA
HST_TO_M
MSPSTAT
AVLIN
CSYNCIN
SWVION5V
SWVION9V
GND
NC(IN)
6 FLDATA
NC
V+5VI 5 GND
2.0 4.9 JL185 R102 100 FLST B IC15 0 B+ JL27 5
V+12R1E JL113 81 FLSTB 50 0.5A 4 V+5 F
CVBSIN
B+ C138 0 JL186 R101 100 FLDATA
32V B+ JL23 3
V+5R8E 2.2 82 GND FLDATA 49 3 V+12R1E
50V
R176 1k JL114 2.9 0 JL187 R148 100 AVLTH JL23 4
SWVION9V 83 FILTSLC AVLTH 48 2 IR
SWVION9V C139 0.1 4.9 4.9 JL188 R146 100 FLPON JL23 5
2 P_CONT
P_CONT
84 VDDVCO XSCMUTE 47 1 FLPO N
P_CONT2
P_CONT2 DET_ANT DTBON R177 100 JL115 0 0 JL189 R152 0 P_SAVE
TO (2/5)
DET_ANT ANT5V_SW 85 DTBON P_SAVE 46
ANT5V_SW DTBON ANT5V_SW R178 100 JL116 0 0 JL190
DTBON FANCTL 86 ANT5V_SW BLAIR 45 CN106 11P
FANCTL RFTHRU DET_ANT R179 100 JL117 0 JL191
RFTHRU
TUON
SWVION5V
TUON
SWVION5V
87
88
DET_ANT
GND
IC101 CAPACITOR
NC 44
43
4.9 JL192 L2.RIN JL23 6
11
10
GND
2R
TU_DCCON R233 C140 0.1 IC103
TU_DCCON 100k 4.9 IT CONTROLLER 0 JL193 SQU BU4220G-TR
GND 89 VDD3 SQUEEZE 42 9 GND
JL118 4.9 JL194 R145 4.9 2.6 JL214 L2.LIN JL23 7
DBGP 2 R180 100 0 10k FUNC_ON
IC101 TO FR-274
D
5
90 DBGP2 FUNC_ON 41 OUT CT 8 2L
DBGP 1 R181 100 JL119 4.9 LC87F06J2A-F58W3-E 4.9
B+ 4.9 BOARD
+5V CN202
2
SAMUTE 91 DBGP1 VDD4 40 IN 7 GND
S AMUTE DBGP 0 R182 100 JL120 4.9 JL21 5 2VIN JL23 8 THROUGH THE
FUNC_IN
FUNC_IN
4
FUNC_ON 92 DBGP0 GND 39 GND NC 6 2V FAR-006 FFC
FUNC_ON LED_PLTV R183 100 JL121 0 4.9 JL195 R205 100 DDC_SW 2
3 BLANK
BLANK
93 LED_PLTV DDCSW2 38 5 GND
AVLTH
TO (4/5)
AVLTH
AVLIN LED_DIVX R184 100 JL122 0 4.8 JL196 R204 100 DDC_SW 1 C156
C157
0.1 Y2IN JL23 9 (SEE PAGE 4-19)
AVLIN 94 LED_DIVX DDCSW1 37 0.1 B 4 2Y
AVLOUT
AVLOUT LED_D_TV R185 100 JL123 0 JL197 C126 0.1
SQU
SQU 95 LED_D_TV NC 36 3 GND
LED_A_TV R186 100 JL124 0 0 JL198 R202 0 RCSEL2 JL24 0
96 LED_A_TV RCSEL2 35 2 SDET 2
LED_HDD2 R187 100 JL125 0 4.9 JL199 R203 0 RCSEL1 C2IN JL24 1
AFT
AFT
AGC
SCL
AGC
SCL DAT_TO_ M R188 330 JL126 0
97
98
LED_HDD2
DAT_TO_M
RCSEL1
XAMUTE2
34
33
4.9 JL200 R144 0 XAMUTE2 IC103 1 2C
4 SDA
SDA
DAM_TO_ T R189 470 JL127 0 JL201 IC101 VDD DET
XRST1
XRST1 MSPSTAT 99 DAM_TO_T NC 32 CN101 40P
TO (5/5) JL128 3.3 JL202 R222 0 JL24 2
MSPSTAT ASCK R200 330 0 AFT HOTPLUG
+5V 100 ASCK AFT 31 40 HPD
DDC_SW 1 JL24 3
HSM_TO_T
BATTDET
39 DDC_SW 1
MODEL1
MODEL2
AVLOUT
CN103 9P
RESET
SDET3
SDET2
SDET1
ACDET
JL10 1 JL24 4
VDD1
XRST
FUNC
DDC_SCL
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
WDT
GND
DBGP2
AGC
SDA
SCL
CF1
CF2
TX1
TX2
NC
NC
NC
NC
DBGP2
IR
9 38 DSCL
E DBGP1 8
JL10 2 R193
100k DBGP1
R194
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
JL24 5
37 CEC
JL10 3 100k DBGP0 DDC_SDA JL24 6
DBGP0 7 36 DSDA
0
JL142 4.9
JL145 3.3
JL147 4.9
JL150 4.9
JL152 1.7
JL155 2.5
JL160 2.4
JL162 2.4
4.9
JL170 4.9
JL172 4.9
JL174 4.9
JL175 4.5
JL176 5.0
0
JL180 4.9
JL182 4.9
JL184 4.9
JL206 5.0
JL205 5.0
JL204 4.9
JL10 4 R195 JL24 7
100k RESET HST_TO_ M
RESET
JL133
JL136
JL139
JL166
JL168
JL178
JL207
JL203
6 35 HST_TO_ M
JL10 5 R196 JL24 8
100 ASCK
FOR CHECK GND 5 34 ASCK
JL10 6 RXD1 B+ B+ DAT_TO_ M JL24 9
RXD1 4 33 DAT_TO_ M
JL10 7 R104 47k JL25 0
1
HSM_TO_ T
100k
100k
R123
R124
R129
R126
R127
R133
R134
R135
TXD1
330
330
330
100
10k
1k
TXD1 3
IC102 32 HSM_TO_ T
R117
C113
1M
JL25 1
330p
DAM_TO_ T
C107
6.8k
R139
C104
6.8k
R141
GND 2 C125 DAM_TO_ T
R105
R109
R110
R111
22 31
100
330
100
100
R137 100
R140 100
R142 100
R143 100
JL272 P_CONT2 JL25 4
C106 R107
T0 28 P_CONT2
R116
R118
0 C124 Q102
0.1 0 27 GND
2SC4154TP-1EF
4.9
JL143 JL156
5.0
L_IN JL25 5
JL14 8
R131 0
F
15MHz
X102
X101
3 2 1 4.7k GND
25
1 JL211 R_IN JL25 6
R132 RDR-HX750(AEP1,UK) /
6.8k 24 R_IN
IN
GND
OUT
C105
IC102
NC
470
AVLOUT
4.9
XRST1
RESET
SCL0
SDA0
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
19 GND
JL131 JL134 EPGEQ 0 C149 B TO MAIN JL26 0
10p NC/B IN
R197 18
JL137 R112 10k 50V
JL273 0
SCL0
SCL
SDA
SDA0
CEC0
DDC_SW 2
DDC_SC L
JL218 17 GND
DDC_SDA
4.9
G TO MAIN JL26 1
R208 L102 16 NC/G IN
C110 2.6 4.9 0 47uH
1 15 GND
B Q101 JL22 0 JL26 2
R224
R223
C152 C/R IN
100
100
5.0
4.4
4.9
5.0
4.4
4.9
2.5 JL279
1.8 R216 9 GND
IC104
1SR154-400TE-25
3.6
3.6
3.6
R753 JL706
4.7k
JL710
R756
R754
150
G-LINK
C 121
1
IC104 E E
PB
1k JL713
JA751 DDC SW JL22 1
IT CONTROLLER, IR
4-5 4-6 AV-114/118 (1/5)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AV-114 BOARD(2/5)
POWER/FAN CONT. Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
A BTOMAIN
5 GTOMAIN
B+
TO V +5V I CN302 24P
AV-114 BOARD JL322
(4/5) GND GN D
24
JL30 5
V +12R 1 FAN-
C302 23
0.1
B+ R301
0 C303 JL323 25V GN D
100 F 22
16V JL329
P_CONT P_CONT
R302 21
0
V +5R8E EV+5.8V
20
B+ B+ JL31 9
GN D
R303 19
0
EV+5.8V
18
JL306
D301 GN D
17
UDZS-TE17-15B
JL317 EV+12.1V
16
B+ C301 JL330
B V+12R1E 0.1
25V
F B+
15
GN D
V +32V
TO VDC-001
14 BOARD
CN106
P_CONT2 P_CONT2
13
JL331 THROUGH THE
DET_ANT DET_ANT
12 FVA-002 FFC
JL332
ANT5V_SW ANT5V_SW
11
JL333 (SEE PAGE 4-17)
DTBON DT_TUON
10
JL31 4 JL325
GN D
9
R218 C205
0 22 Y_IN
8
25V JL326
D201 GN D
1SS355TE-17 7
R251
L201 0 B_IN
1mH 6
C204 C202
100 0.1 GN D
C208 5
C206 16V 25V 0.1
470p F 5.4 16V G_IN
50V B 4
0.3
FANCTL GN D
3
C JL307
JL311
Q201 2
C/R_I N
R219
3.3k R220 2SD2114KT146 GN D
2.2k 1
FAN CONT
GND C/R_I N
Y_IN
B+ GND 6
V +5V I V+5V I TO
R308 0 JL34 5
R307 0 JL34 4
B+ V+5V O
AV-114 BOARD (3/5)
B+
Q302 V+9V
2SC4154TP-1EF
B+ +5V REG
JL31 2 5.6 4.9 B+ JL34 3
V+5BB
2 L303
0uH JL315
TO (1/5) 0 JL336 5.7 5.0 B+
5 5.6
R304 C305
100 0.1
JL34 1
D 25V
F 5.6
4
5.6
3 R306 0
JL339
5.6 Q306
JL30 8
1 0 33 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
6 +5V REG
Q301 C306 C307 C308
UMD2N-TR 0.1 100 100 5.7 5.6
25V 16V 16V
+5V REG F 3
4
2
4.9 JL334 1 6
R318
0 JL313 5.6 5.0 B+ JL34 6
V+5TU
0 JL316
R305 C309 5
12.0
33 0.1 5.6 JL337 9.0 B+ JL34 7
25V
E F 5.6
3
5.6 JL34 0
JL309
4
0 9.6
7
0 Q308
1 6 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
R309 TO (5/5)
C310 C311 C312 C329 1.5k +9V REG
0.1 220 100 0.1 D304
Q303 25V 16V 16V 25V 9.7 9.6 1SS355TE-17
2
4.9 UMD2N-TR F F 4 3
+5V REG JL335 6
1
JL320 0 C318 C319 C320
TUON 0.1 100 100
25V 16V 16V
Q307 F
2 UMD2N-TR
4.8
B+ JL34 2
D302
SWVION9 V UDZSTE-179.1B
F +9V REG B+
IC317
0.5A L304
D303 L305
32V B+ 1SS355TE-17 JL32 7 0uH B+
330uH
V +32V
C323 C328
1 R313 R315 C326
R310 R314 100k 10 0.1
4.7k 50V 22k 180k 50V
F 0.5% 50V
F
JL304 12.0 JL32 1
JL302 JL303 0.3 6.2 1 4 6.2
TU_DCCO N
R311 5.7 JL324
820
C322
JL318
2
5
5.7
SIGNAL PATH
100p 6 3 R316
C324 0.6 22k
50V 0.1
25V
0.5% VIDEO SIGNAL
F AUDI O
0.3
JL310 JL32 8
GND CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
Q310 Q309
0.6
2SC5876T106QR
Q311 REC
2SC4154TP-1EF XP4401
R312
G +32V SWITCHING
REG
10k +32V SWITCHING
REG +32V SWITCHING
REG PB
POWER/FAN CONT.
AV-114 (2/5) 4-7 4-8
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AV-118 BOARD(2/5)
POWER/FAN CONT. Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
A
B+
5 V +5V I
JL322
TO GND
AV-118 BOARD(4/5) JL30 5
V +12R 1 C302
0.1
B+ R301
0 C303 JL323 25V
100 F CN301 5P
16V JL329
P_CONT 1 P_CONT
R302
0 TO POWER BLOCK
V +5R8E JL31 9 2 EV+12.1V CN202
B+ B+ THROUGH THE
3 GN D
R303 PAE-002 HARNESS
0
4 EV+5.8V
D301 JL306
(SEE PAGE 4-38)
5 GN D
UDZS-TE17-15B
JL317
B+ C301
B V+12R1E 0.1
25V
F
CN201 2P FAN
JL31 4 JL325
1 FAN +
R218 C205
0 22 2 FAN -
25V
D201
1SS355TE-17 JL326
R251
L201 0
1mH
C204 C202
100 0.1 C208
C206 16V 25V 0.1
470p F 5.4 16V
50V B
0.3
FANCTL
C JL307
JL311
Q201
R219
3.3k R220 2SD2114KT146
2.2k FAN CONT
GND GND
6
B+ TO
V +5V I V+5V I AV-118 BOARD(3/5)
JL34 5
JL34 4
B+ V+5V O
B+
Q302 V+9V
R308 0
R307 0
2SC4154TP-1EF
B+ +5V REG
JL31 2 5.6 4.9 B+ JL34 3
V+5BB
2 L303
0uH JL315
TO (1/5) 0 JL336 5.7 5.0 B+
5 5.6
R304 C305
100 0.1
JL34 1
D 25V
F 5.6
4
5.6
3 R306 0
JL339
5.6 Q306
JL30 8
1 0 33 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
6 +5V REG
Q301 C306 C307 C308
UMD2N-TR 0.1 100 100 5.7 5.6
25V 16V 16V
+5V REG F 3
4
2
4.9 JL334 1 6
R318
0 JL313 5.6 5.0 B+ JL34 6
V+5TU
0 JL316
R305 C309 5
12.0
33 0.1 5.6 JL337 9.0 B+ JL34 7
25V
E F 5.6
3
5.6 JL34 0
JL309
4
0 9.6
7
0 Q308
1 6 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
R309 TO (5/5)
C310 C311 C312 C329 1.5k +9V REG
0.1 220 100 0.1 D304
Q303 25V 16V 16V 25V 9.7 9.6 1SS355TE-17
2
4.9 UMD2N-TR F F 4 3
+5V REG JL335 6
1
JL320 0 C318 C319 C320
TUON 0.1 100 100
25V 16V 16V
Q307 F
2 UMD2N-TR
4.8
B+ JL34 2
D302
SWVION9 V UDZSTE-179.1B
F +9V REG
IC317
0.5A L304
D303 L305
32V B+ 1SS355TE-17 JL32 7 0uH B+
330uH
V +32V
C323 C328
1 R313 R315 C326
R310 R314 100k 10 0.1
4.7k 50V 22k 180k 50V
F 0.5% 50V
F
JL304 12.0 JL32 1
JL302 JL303 0.3 6.2 1 4 6.2
TU_DCCO N
R311 5.7 JL324
820
C322
JL318
2
5
5.7
SIGNAL PATH
100p 6 3 R316
C324 0.6 22k
50V 0.1
25V
0.5% VIDEO SIGNAL
F AUDI O
0.3 GND
JL310 JL32 8
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
Q310 Q309
0.6
2SC5876T106QR
Q311 REC
2SC4154TP-1EF XP4401
R312
G +32V SWITCHING
REG
10k +32V SWITCHING
REG +32V SWITCHING
REG PB
POWER/FAN CONT.
4-9 4-10 AV-118 (2/5)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TEXTVI N
VIDEO/AUDIO
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- JL488
1.6
R455
47 SIGNAL PATH
Q403 IC403 VIDEO SIGNAL
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF C461 MM1503XNRE AUDI O
1
4.9 0 B JL485 4.9 JL48 7 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
3 6 IN 1 SW
1
0.5 2.0 1.6 Y_I N
2 B+ GND OUT REC
2
4.9 JL486 4.9
IN 2 Vcc
3
4.9
4 1
Q411 C460 2.3 PB
UMD2N-TR R459 1 C462
75 B 1
0.5%
IC402
BUFFER
R_IN
L_IN
2.3 C/R W
TO
RCSEL1 Q410 AV-118 BOARD(1/5)
2.3 Q408 RCSEL
2SC4154TP-1EF 1.6 1.6
RCSEL2 0 2SC4154TP-1EF
Y_I N
RTOMAI N
IC402
C472 BA4558F-E2 C475
10 10 Q413 C/R_IN
50V 4.6 50V DTC124EUA-T106
9.0 B+ B+ 6
V+9V
8
1
4.6 4.6 TO
+
AV-114 BOARD(2/5)
7
2
C464
-
C473 V+5VI
4.6 4.6 0.1 100
+ 25V 16V
6
-
3
F V+5VO
AV1_ROUT
AV2_ROUT
AV1_LOUT
AV2_LOUT
RGBOUT
4.6
C_OU T
Y_OU T
YP_OUT
CR_OUT
CB_OUT
BLANK
5
4
GND
JL4416
R_IN
R_IN V+9V
L_IN R453 C471 C474
R463
B+ B+
10 10
UDZSTE-1711B
L_IN 8.2k V+5VI
RCSEL1 0.5% 50V 50V 8.2k
0.5% C450 C451 R401 B+ 6
C
D401
RCSEL1 4.7 4.7 0 R461
50V 50V C453 C404 680 V +5V O TO
10k 0.5% JL4424
RCSEL2 100 1
RCSEL2 JL4423 10V 10V AV-118 BOARD(2/5)
F
BLANK
GND
BLANK
10k 0.5%
R403 560
C413
0.1
Y_OUT
16V
0.1 1 1
B
CB_OUT
16V 10V 10V
CB_OUT JL45 5 B B B D410
CR_OUT
0 UMZ6.8N-T106
CR_OUT
JL456
4.6 JL453
4.5 JL452
JL451
JL450
JL449
JL448
2.3 JL447
4.9 JL446
JL445
JL444
2.3 JL443
JL442
2.3 JL441
JL440
2.3 JL439
JL438
2.3 JL437
2.3 JL436
YP_OUT R407
Y_IN 0 C486 R468
Y_IN 470 68 R469
6.3V 0.5% JL441 8 3.9 JL4422
TEXTVIN C438
4.6
4.5
4.5
9.0
4.5
4.5
4.5
2.2
2.3
2.3
1
0
TEXTVIN 10V
F C454
1 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 100
10V
1
2VIN JA401
3
VCC
VCC
A HorHDD/OUT(L)
A HorHDD/OUT(R)
A AV1/OUT(R)
A AV2/OUT(R)
A AV1/OUT(L)
A AV2/OUT(L)
A AV1/OUT2(L)
A AV1/OUT2(R)
To DVD(R)
To DVD(L)
VIDEO AGC
SLICER OUT
TO (1/5) 2VIN
MAIN C D
PAL SCART IN
F A DVD(R)
DVD C OUT
PAL SCART D2
F DVD C
PAL SCART D1
F DVD Y
RGB M OUT
F DVD Pb(B)
F DVD Pr(R)
F DVD PY(G)
F A DVD(L)
MAIN C IN
A DVD M C
C414 C435
C 436 4 S VIDEO
G
Y2IN 0.1 R433 1
1
D Y2IN 25V 1M 10V
C476
4
F JL457 4.5 B 10V
C2IN 1.8 JL435 BI N 0.01
2
B R470
C2IN 81 A HIFI IN(R) SCART B IN 50 25V 75 R471
C415 JL458 4.5 B 0.5% 0
XAMUTE2 0.1 2.3 JL434 R/CI N JL4420 JL441 9 JL4421
XAMUTE2 25V 82 A HIFI IN(L) SCART RorC IN 49
AMUTE1 F JL459 0 1.8 JL433 GI N D409
AMUTE1 R422 83 V DVD M C SCART G IN 48 UMZ6.8N-T106
10k JL460 4.5
R_OUT 4.9 C437
R_OUT C468 1
0.1 84 A L4 IN(R) VCC 47 R435
L_OUT JL461 4.5 0.4 1M
10V
B GOUT 3
L_OUT C469
C411 1 0 . 1 85 A L4 IN(L) PY(Y)G OUT 46 LINE 2
R408 JL483 10V B JL462 4.5
CSYNCIN TU_RIN 470 0.3 R/COUT OUT
CSYNCIN
SDA
R413
TU_LI N 470 JL484 C412 1
10V B JL463 4.5
86 A TUNER IN(R)
IC401 Pr(Cr)/RorC OUT 45
0.3 BOUT JL4401
SDA 87 A TUNER IN(L) Pb(Cb)/B OUT 44
UMZ6.8N-T106
R436
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
SCL 4.5 VIDEO/AUDIO 4.4 JL432 100 SCL
SCL SCL 43
D416
88 VREF(9V/2) SELECTOR
D413
D414
D415
R414 JL480 C419 1 R437 JA402
B+ V+5V 470 10V B JL464 4.5 4.4 JL431 100 SDA R801
V+5V
V 89 A L3 IN(R) SDA 42 0
R415 JL479 C420 1 JL465 4.5
P_SAVE 470 10V B 4.8 JL430 CSYNCI N V
P_SAVE 90 A L3 IN(L) IC401 SYNC 41
R416 JL478 C421 1 HA118326APFR-E C487 R472 R473 VIDEO
L2_RIN 470 10V B JL466 4.5 2.2 470 6.3V 68 0.5% JL4407
3.9
L2_RIN 91 A L2 IN(R) PY(Y)OUT 40
R417 C422 1 C 489 R476 0.5% R477 JL4411
L2_LIN JL477 10V B JL467 4.5 2.5 470 6.3V JL4408
470 68 3.9
L2_LIN 92 A L2 IN(L) Pr(Cr)/OUT 39
C423 1 C 488
E AV1_RIN
AV1_RIN JL4426 R418
470
R419
JL476 10V
C424
JL475 10V
B
1
JL468 4.5
93 A L5 IN(R) Pb(Cb)/OUT 38
2.5 470 6.3V
R474
68 0.5%
JL4409 R475
3.9
JL4413
JL4412 CR
S1/S2 B OUT
AUDIO R
RS IN D OUT
0.5%
VIDEO L3 IN
VIDEO L2 IN
VIDEO L1 IN
6.3V C491
BOUT L802
SEP C2 IN
V C&S C3 IN
SEP Y1 IN
SEP Y2 IN
SEO C1 IN
DL3 DRIVE
59/61PIN
47 Q406
SYNC DET
SYNC DET
TUNER IN
L_OUT 35V
C1 OUT
2SD2114KT146
V1 OUT
Y1 OUT
R/COUT
COMPONENT
FBCD
FBCD
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
R/COUT
FBC
Y
BG
JL40 5 1.8
4.8
JL40 6 2.3
JL40 8 1.8
JL40 9 0.6
JL41 0 2.3
JL41 3 1.8
JL41 4 1.8
JL41 5 2.7
JL41 6 1.8
2.9
JL41 7 2.2
JL41 9 1.7
JL42 0 2.7
2.2
JL42 2 2.7
JL42 4 4.9
JL42 5 2.5
4.9
2.2
GIN
0
50V
R/CIN JL49 6
F
JL40 4
JL40 7
JL41 1
JL41 2
JL41 8
JL42 1
JL42 3
R/CIN
BIN
R438
JL40 2
BIN Q401
0
RGBOUT DTC124EUA-T106
2.3
RGBOUT R420 R448 B+
AV2_ROUT P_SAVE JL40 1 0 R425 C457 0 JL49 9 0.7 C484
R421
1.8M R487
1.8M
100k 10 470p
AV2_ROUT 22k
50V R486 50V
AV2_LOUT C493
47 1k
Q407 0
R432
0.1 1 0.1 1
R431
R428
1M
1M
AV1_LOUT C498 C499 C443 B B B B C440 C441 C442 R488 R490 JL498
0.1 1 0.1 1 C 458 D402 470 100
0.1 0.1 100
AV1_LOUT 25V 25V 10V 16V 10V 25V DTZ-TT11-6.8B
RTOMAIN F B B F 10V XAMUTE2 JL492
F F
RTOMAIN
C456 C500 C444 C445 C496 C434
0.5%
C447
R447
B
R444
TU_RIN 6 3
75
R445
NNCD3.9F-T1B
8 2.7 0
NNCD3.9F-T1B
TU_LIN 75 AMUTE1
TU_LIN 0.5%
D421
2
D422
5
TO (5/5) TU_VIN JL493
TU_VIN
D418 1 4
4.3 Q404
G V+5V
1SS355TE-17 UMD2N-TR
AV1_V/YI N
AV2_V/YOUT
AV1_V/YOUT
AV2_V/YIN
2VI N
C2IN
VIDEO/AUDIO
AV-114/118 (3/5) 4-11 4-12
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AV-114/118 BOARD(4/5)
EURO R516
R515 1.2k
560 JL533
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES-
R517 R518 12.0
B+ 1.5k JL53 1 10 12.0 Q502
R569 R566 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
A 1k 22k
SQU
JL532
-1.9
SWITCH
B TO MAIN C551
11 0 22 FUNC_ON D501
25V UDZS-TE17-5.1B
G T0 MAIN 1.7
TO (1/5) Q511 AVLTH JL527 AV-114 BOARD
AV-118 BOARD
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF B+ R506 0 JL529
BUFFER R568 +5V
12k
5.0
R507 R509 D527 JL53 4
0
R510 1SS355TE-17 JL528
V+12R1 4.7k 27k R574 D502
JL514 2.2M
5 R562 AVLIN 5 4 D523
0 U DZS-TE17-5.1B D526
TO V+5VI 10k Q505 DAN217UT106 1SS355TE-17
R508 JL516 2SC4154TP-1EF
VCC
4.9
TC7S66FU(TE85R)
CONT
AV-118 BOARD(2/5) 47k
GND C550 Q504 0 AV IN,OUT JL53 0
4.9 22 JL515 4.5 SWITC H
IC406
25V 2SC4154TP-1EF R511
2.9 AV IN,OUT 220k 0 6.3 4 1 9.5
Q510 3 SWITCH 4.5 C515 C 510
IN/OUT
OUT/IN
2SC4154TP-1EF 0 C517 0.1 0.1 0 0
R564
GND
BUFFER 2.3 R565 Q503 0 220p
15k TO (1/5) 5 2
680 2SC4154TP-1EF
GTOMAIN JL517 JL52 5 JL52 6 D524
AV IN,OUT 0 1 2 3
Q501
SWITCH C511 R512 R520 R513
DAN217UT106 6 3
UMH1NTN
4.5
1.1
R558 220p 100k 220 100k
B+ 10k SWITCH
V+5VI
C547
4.9 22 AVLOUT
5 25V
Q509 2.9
2SC4154TP-1EF FUNC_IN
TO BUFFER
AV-114 BOARD(2/5)
BTOMAIN
2.3 BLANK
SAMUTE
IC406 R519
56k
AV LTH SW D530
R561 R560 JL512
680 15k JL508 UDZSTE-1713B
Q506 JL513
GND HN1C03FU-TE85R
MUTE SW 0 6 3 0 R535
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
C516
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
3.9k D531 470p
B+ JL505 0.7 0.7
D516
UMZ6.8N-T106
D514
D515
D517
D513
V+12R1 JA501
R534 2 5 C518 42P
C545 C541 JL509 1000p
RTOMAIN D528 100
3.9k 4.7 R536
L851
1SS355TE-17 R542 50V 1 4 R537 L853 L852 0uH
16V 470 100 0uH 0uH
100 JL54 9 1.ROUT
AV1_ROUT
1
AV1_RIN JL55 0 2.RIN
JL55 1
2
AV1_LOUT 3.LOUT
3
AV1_LIN 4.GNDA
R539 R521
4
R543 C542 R538 5.GNDV
5
C 100 4.7
50V
470 100 68
0.5% JL51 9
R522
3.9
C520 1000p L854 0uH
JL55 2
JL55 3
6.LIN
6
BOUT 7.BOUT
7
JL55 4 8.FUNCTION
R547 R540 R541 C529
8
R546 100k 100k 9.GNDV
9
UMZ6.8N-T106
100k 470
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
100k JL55 5 10.N-LINK
6.3V
JL55 6
20 18 16 14 12 10
D522
11.GOUT
21 19 17 15 13 11
D518
D521
D519
D520
JL55 7 12.NC LINE 1 / TV
C519
R548 R549 470p 13.GNDV
C530 R523
100k 100k C 531 470 68 R524 14.GNDV
470 6.3V 0.5% JL55 8 15.R/COUT
3.9
6.3V JL520 JL55 9 16.BLANK
GOUT
R/COUT R525 68 JL521 R526 3 . 9 R529 17.GNDV
0.5% JL522 R528 75 0.5% 100k
RGBOUT 18.GNDV
R527 0 JL523 R531 0 JL56 0 19.V/YOUT
AV1_V/YOUT
AV1_V/YIN JL524 R563 0 JL56 1 20.V/YIN
9 JL510 C532 R530 JL56 2 21.GNDV
11.3
UMZ6.8N-T106
470
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
NNCD3.9F-T1B
1000p
1000p
UMZ6.8N-T106
JL506 75 R532 L501 L855
C505
C507
Q507
470p
470p
6.3V
C506
C508
TO (3/5) JL511 0.5% 75 0uH 0uH
D503
D507
HN1C03FU-TE85R
D504
JL501
D505
0
D506
0.5%
MUTE SW 0 0 R556
9
3 6 L856
R557 3.9k
L858 L857 0uH
11.2 3 . 9 k JL504 0.7 0.7 0uH 0uH JL53 5
22.ROUT
42 40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22
Q508 5 2
JL507
JL53 6
23.RIN
C543 JL53 7
DTA124EUA-T106
41 39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23
C544 4.7 4 R550 R551 24.LOUT
SA MUTE 4.7 50V R544 1 R553
470 100 25.GNDA
D AV2_ROUT
AV2_RIN
JL502 50V 100 100
L859 0uH
JL53 8
JL53 9
26.GNDV
27.LIN
AV2_LOUT 28.BIN
JL54 0
JL503 R545 100 R552 29.FUNCTION
AV2_LIN 470 R573 0uH 30.GNDV
JL54 1
BIN 31.N-LINK
JL54 2
GIN 32.GIN
D529 UDZSTE-1713B JL54 3
33.NC
34.GNDV LINE 3 / DECORDER
35.GNDV
JL54 4
R/CIN 36.R/CIN
JL54 5
37.BLANK
C528 R504 C503
470 68 R505 L862 38.GNDV
L803 100p
6.3V 0.5% JL51 8 3.9 0uH 50V 39.GNDV
AV2_V/YOUT 0 JL54 6
40.V/YOUT
AV2_V/YIN JL54 7
41.V/YIN
JL54 8
R559 42.GNDV
UMZ6.8N-T106
UMZ6.8N-T106
NNCD3.9F-T1B
NNCD3.9F-T1B
NNCD3.9F-T1B
0 L502 L860
C552 0uH 0uH L861
D508
R554 R555 R571 R514 R503 R502 R501
D509
D510
D511
D512
100k 100k 75 75 75 75 75 100p 0uH
0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 50V
EURO
4-13 4-14 AV-114/118 (4/5)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AERIAL
AV-114/118 BOARD(5/5)
TUNER IN OUT
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
SIF OUT
AGC OUT
AFT OUT
GND
GND
SDA
SCL
MB
NC
BB
TU
JL603
JL605
JL608
JL609
JL610
JL611
JL612
JL616
JL617
L601 SIGNAL PATH
R638
100
0uH R635
0uH
B+ JL60 1
R636
R637
VIDEO SIGNAL
0uH
0uH
V+5B B
B+ JL602 AUDI O
V +32V
B+ B+ CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
7 V+5TU
L602
TO (2/5) 0uH REC
C602 R609
2200p 0
50V R603 C611 C608 PB
B 0 47 0.47
35V 10V
B
GND
C609 C603 C604
B JL604
100 2200p 100p
10V 50V
B
50V
JL61 8
AGC
R605 Q601
C606 4.5 10k ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
10p R607
1k 3.9 BUFFER
50V
C605 Q602 1.6 R602
10p ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 1k
50V
AGC
AFT
R606 2.2 JL620
L604 L605 10k
0uH 0uH
B+
+5V
B+
L606 C617 C638 C618 C639 L608
L607 0.1 10 0.1 3.3
100uH 0uH 0uH
25V 50V 25V 50V C641
F F 10
50V B+
C613 C614
JL632
JL635
JL637
JL639
JL641
JL643
C640
0.1 0.1 100
25V 25V 10V
2.6
2.5
3.5
F F
C C 642
100
C619
0.1
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
10V 25V
C620 C643 F
R630 C615 C622 C621 1 100 R623
100p 56p 56p
VREFTOP
C616 330 10V 1k
MONOIN
50V 50V 10V
NC/ASG
50V
AGNDC
CAPLM
AHVSS
0.01 L609 F
SC1R
AVSS
25V 10uH TU_VIN
NC
NC
NC
B C628
4.9 5.0 0.01
AVSUP AHVSUP
33
25V
1
JL61 9 JL62 1 1.5 JL64 6 B JL65 9
AIN1 + NC JL65 6
32
TU_LIN
2
JL62 2 1.5 JL64 7
R631 AIN1 - SCOL Q604
31
4
IC601
3
4.7k C 629 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
C623 JL64 8 3900p
4.9 TESTEN SCOR BUFFER 2.2 8
30
3p 50V
4
TO (1/5) Q606 R624
1.5 50V EURO MSP JL64 9 B 3.3k 1.5
2SC4154TP-1EF CJ 2.3 XI N VREF1
29
5
SIF AMP TO (3/5 )
R632 JL614 JL62 3 2.1 JL650 R625
22 XOUT IC601 TP 3.3k
28
JL66 1
6
0.9 MSP3417G-QG-B8V3
R616 JL62 4 1.4
X601 0 TP DACML
27
JL615
7
18.432MHz C630
JL62 5 0 1.4 JL65 1 560p R626 C627 C626
DCO1 DACMR
26
MSPSTAT 50V
8
1k 0.1 0.1
C624 JL62 6 JL65 2 25V 25V
R634 R633 DCO0 VREF2 F F
25
3p
9
2.2k 100 50V
D CJ JL62 7
ADSEL TP
10
24
JL62 8 4.9 JL65 3 JL657 JL660
11 STBYQ TP
23
TU_RIN
R619 JL65 4 Q605
10k C631 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
0.01
RESETQ
C 632 BUFFER
10
DVSUP
25V
DVSS
3900p
SDA
SCL
50V B 2.2
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
R627
B 3.3k 1.5
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
R628
JL63 8
JL64 0
JL64 2
JL634
JL636
3.3k
4.9
4.8
JL65 8
JL644
JL645
4.3
4.3
B+
C633
JL631
JL633
C625
560p
R620
1
50V
0
10V
F
C636 JL655
C635
22p 22p
R621 100 50V 50V
SCL
R622 100
SDA
E XRST1
TUNER
AV-114/118 (5/5) 4-15 4-16
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveform.
• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
VDC-001 BOARD
VIDEO DECODER
-REF.NO.: 40,000 SERIES-
A R161 0 B+ B+
FAN CN103 2P TP126
CN104 28P
FAN+ 1 TP127
NC
C197 0 . 1 25V 28
4.7k
4.7k
STREAM_ 0
STREAM_ 1
STREAM_ 2
STREAM_ 3
STREAM_ 4
STREAM_ 5
STREAM_ 6
STREAM_ 7
R186
R187
FAN- 2 TP15 8
GND
27
TP128 R182 0
SDA_VDEC
26
TP129 R183 0
SCL_VDEC
25
GND
24
TP130
NC
T P125 2 4 6 8 23
TP131
R164 NC
100 R176 22
100
GND
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 21
R157
0 C245 C244 XRESET
20
B C186 R175 C188 C191 C193
0.1
C195 16V C198 C200
0.1
16V GND
1 10k 1 1 1 1 F 1 1 F 19
7 5 3 1 C 246 GND
R163 18
R152 1000p R174 10k TP133 R185 0
10k 50V 10k VCLK
T P114
T P116
T P117
17
TP115
8 6 4 2 B
CN105 12P TO RD-065
T P101 GND
16 BOARD (2/7)
P-CONT 1 STREAM_ 7 TP134
B+ B+ TP1129 15
STREAM_7 CN4701
B+
3.3
1.5
3.3
1.5
3.3
1.5
3.3
0.8
0.4
0.4
0.4
1.5
0.8
0.4
1.2
SW+3.3V B+ TP135
0
2 STREAM_ 6 THROUGH THE
C103 1 T P168 T P180 TP172 STREAM_6
14 FVR-001 FFC
GND 3 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 STREAM_ 5 TP136
T P102 T P157 R125 STREAM_5
C124 C134 13
330 (SEE PAGE 4-26)
FCKQ
DVDD1N
DVDD1M
BCKM
RDEO
DVDD3H
BLK
VD
HD
DVDD1L
ROCK
ROY0
ROY1
DVDD3G
ROY2
ROY3
ROY4
ROY5
DVDD1K
ROY6
ROY7
DGND8
BCLK8
FOCP
DVDD3I
DFBI
DVDD3J
DYSI
FCSI
DGND12
FDIO9
FDIO8
FDIO7
FDIO6
FDIO5
FDIO4
FDIO3
FDIO2
DGND11
FDIO1
FDIO0
FILD
DGND10
DGND9
SW+3.3V 4 7p 7p 5.0 STREAM_ 4 TP137
TO 50V 50V T P176 C 247 STREAM_4
C106 TP1160 1000p 12
SWITCHING GND 220 C112 50V TP138
5
4V 1 Q103 L102 L106 B
STREAM_ 3
STREAM_3
REGULATOR T P103 B+ ISA1602AM1TP-1EF R129 R141 1.8 3.3 B+ 11
470 10uH 18uH 10 C 228 DVDD3F
CN202 EV+5.8V 6 0.5% 1.2 T P150 1 133 DVDD10 88 STREAM_ 2 TP139
C113 0.1 Y BPF 1.5 0.3 10
STREAM_2
2.3 DYMI ROY8
THROUGH THE EV+5.8V 7 C118 C128 C138 R137 Q107 134 87 STREAM_ 1 TP140
TP1156 22p 82p 15p 1.8k 0 1.9 STREAM_1
PV-145 HERNESS 2SC4154TP-1EF 9
GND 8 50V 50V 50V 0.5% DCGI ROY9 TP141
R145 C142 135 86 STREAM_ 0
C115 100 16V R104 1.6
BUFFER 680 1 C178 0 8
STREAM_0
T P106 47 10 DCBI ROY10
EV+12V 9 136 85
C (SEE PAGE 4-38) C101 0.1 16V 0 7
GND
GND 10 DCRI ROY11 TP142
F10 3 137 84
T P104 C114 1 6.3V B+ T P153 0 NC
6
SW+1.5V 11 AVDD1 ROY12 B+ C208 1 TP143
I EM I O R149 138 83
B+ T P122 1.5 NC
C102 C232 C233 47k 5
G C177
SW+1.5V 12 100
1
10 1000p 139 ATS1 ROY13 82 TP144
16V T P169 T P181 TP173 10V 50V T P123 0 1.5 C210 1 NC
C116 C B 4
R124 DVDD1J
220
330 F10 2 140 ATS2 81 TP145
4V TP152 R150 0 GND
C123 C133 B+ 3
7p 7p 5.0 47k AVDD3A DGND7 TP146
I EM I O R151 141 80
SW+1.5V 50V 50V T P177 T P124 3.3 3.3 NC
(NOT USE) C109
TP165
G
47k 2
1 C161 C176 C180 142 ATS3 ROFDIE 79
T P105
Q102 R128 L101 L105 R140 1.8 220 1 1000p 0 TP1128 R170 R184 1
GND
470 10uH 18uH 10 4V AGND1 FCLK8 10k C209 0
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 0.5% 1.2 T P149 143 78 1
C/R BPF AGND2 FCKM
2.3 C117 C127 C137 R136 Q106 144 77
TP1157 22p 82p 15p 1.8k 1.5 C243
50V 50V 50V 0.5% 2SC4154TP-1EF AGND3 DVDD1I 1000p C24 2
R144 C141 145 76 R171 50V 0.01
R105 1.6
BUFFER 680 1 TP1130 3.3 TP1127 47k B 16V
47 C 162 VCLY RGRED B
0.1 146 75
C163 16V TP1131 1.4 3.3 TP132
RSTB
C149 0.1 147 VCOM1 74
0.01 16V TP1132 1.5
AVI SLA0
148 73
TP1133 1.0 3.2
D T P182 TP174
C 164
0.1 149 VLPF1
SDA
72
T P170 C153 16V TP1134 1.1 3.3
0.1 150
ASYI
IC104 SCL
71
I
R126 16V TP1135 0.9 1.5 C211 1 F107
EMI
330 C125 C135
7p 7p 5.0 C 165 VRB1 DVDD1H
G
CN106 24P 0.1 151 VIDEO DECODER 70
50V 50V T P178 TP1136 1.9
TP166 C154 16V
C110 ACYI AGNDA4
IC105
O
GND 24 0.1 152 69
1 L103 L107 16V
T P109 Q104 R130 R142 2.3 TP1137 0.9 B+
470 10uH 18uH 10 C 166 IOCR
C/R_IN 23 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 0.5% 1.7 0.1 153 VRT1 68 F106 SDRAM
G BPF T P148
C155 16V TP1138 2.4 IC104 3.3 TP164 B+ C248 220 4V
2.9 0.1 154 ACSI UPD64015AGM-UEU-A AVDDA3
GND 22
TP1158
C119 C129 C139 R138 Q108 16V
67 O EM I I C252
T P110 22p 82p 15p 1.8k 0.9 0.1
G_IN 50V 50V 50V 0.5% 2SC4154TP-1EF C 182 AVDD3B AGNDA3 G C220 1 IC105 16V
21 R146 C143 1 155 66 F
R106 2.3 BUFFER 680 1 3.3 C21 2 HY57V161610FTP-6-C
GND 47 AVDD3C IOCB 1
20 156 65 C249 16V
T P111 TP1139 3.3 3.3 6.3V B+ 3.3
0.1 F
C 167 VRT2 AVDDA2
50
C147
1
B_IN 19 0.1 157 64
0.01 TP1140 0 1.3 VDD1 VSS 2 1.2
16V SDRDQ0 SDRDQ15
ASCI AGNDA2
49
2
GND 18 158 63
T P112 TP1141 0 1.2 DQ0 DQ1 5 1.9
SDRDQ1 SDRDQ14
C 168 VRB2 OYG
48
C148
3
Y_IN 17 0.1 159 62
T P171 T P183 TP175 0.01 TP1142 0 3.3 DQ1 DQ1 4
16V
AGI AVDDA1
47
4
GND 16 160 61
T P304 R127 TP1143 0 1.3 VSSQ1 VSSQ4 1.4
330 R131 C126 C136 C21 4 SDRDQ2 SDRDQ13
5.0 C 169 RSET
46
7p 7p 161 161 1
5
NC 15 470 60
E TO AV-114
T P305
C111 TP167
0.5% 50V 50V R143 T P179
10
0.1
C156 16V TP1144 0
REF
6.3V
SDRDQ3 1.2 DQ2 DQ1 3 1.5 SDRDQ12
45
0.1 162 ACBI
6
NC 14 1 59
BOARD (2/5) Q105 L104 L108 2.3 16V 0 C221 1 DQ3 DQ1 2 C224 1
T P306 B+ B+ TP1145 C240 3.3 3.3
CN302 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 10uH 18uH C 170 AGNDA1
44
C146 1000p
7
NC 13 1.7 0.1 163 VRT3 58
T P307 T P147 0.01 TP1146 0 1.5 C226 0 . 1 16V 50V VDDQ1 VDDQ4 1.6
THROUGH THE B BPF 16V
DVDD1G B SDRDQ4 1.4 SDRDQ11
2.9
43
164 ABI
8
FVA-002 FFC P-CONT2 12 C120 C132 C140 R139 Q109 57
T P308 TP1159 22p 82p 15p 1.8k C 171 TP1147 0 C241 1.3 DQ4 DQ1 1 1.6
C253 2SC4154TP-1EF 0.1 C219 SDRDQ5 SDRDQ10
50V 50V 50V 0.5% DGND6 0.1
42
0.1 165 VRB3 7p
9
NC 11 16V 56 16V
16V R107 2.3 BUFFER R147 TP1148 0 1.6 TP1126 F
50V T P159 DQ5 DQ1 0
(SEE PAGE 4-8) F 47 680 C 172 XI
10
41
GND 10 F10 1 0.1 166 VCOM3 55
T P151 B+ 0 1.6 TP1124 TP1125 1.5 VSSQ2 VSSQ3 1.6
16V SDRDQ6 SDRDQ9
XO
11
40
EV+12V 9 I EM I O 167 AVDD3D 54
C183 3.3 3.3 C216 X101 1.1 DQ6 DQ 9 1.6
C144 1 R169 1k 1 C218 SDRDQ7 SDRDQ8
G DVDD3E
12
24.576MHz
39
168 AVDD3E
GND 8
IC103 1 C151
220
4V
C158
0.1
C160
1000p C185
0.1
TP1161 3.3
53
1.1
7p
50V C222 1 3.3 DQ7 DQ 8 3.3
C25 1
1000p
50V
B
13
SDRDQ15
38
EV+5.8V 7 IC101 B+ 16V 169 VCOM4 52
5V REG 0 1.1 VDDQ2 VDDQ3
MM1563DFBE B+ C 157
TP1149
14
SDRDQ0
37
GND 6 IC103 0.1 170 ACRI 51
C254 4.8 TP187 0 C239 LDQM NC/RFU
0.1 1.9 S-1112B50MC-L7JTFG C173
16V TP1150 1.3 1000p 1 SDRW E 3.2 C225 1
15
SDRDQ14
36
EV+5.8V C145
5
5 CN 171 VLPF2 50
4
16
VI N VOUT SDRDQ1
35
P-CONT 172 ARI
6
4 GND
5
49
3
B+ 5.7
SUB
C 174 0 1.5 C217 1 XCAS CLK
T P310 TP162 TP1152 SDRRA S 3.2 3.3 SDRCKE
0.1
17
VS S
34
GND 173 VRB4 DVDD1F
7
3 NC 48
2
VI N R148 16V
T P113 33k T P189 TP190 TP1153 0 1.3 3.1 XRAS CKE
3.3 4.8 C175 SDRC S
F
18
ON/OFF NC 174 VRT4
33
FAN- C234 0.1 SDRDQ13
3
2 VO C184
4
47
1
19
2.2
32
GND 1 6.3V 1000p
1
C159
10V
R133 175 AGND4 SDRDQ2 46
50V 1 0 0.1 BA A9 0.2
B 6.3V B SDRAB P SDRA8
20
31
F105 176 AGND5 DGND5 45
TP154 B+ 0.2 A10/AP A8 0.4
SDRA0 SDRA7
SDRDQ10
SDRDQ11
SDRDQ12
21
30
IC101
SDRA10
SDRRAS
SDRDQ7
SDRDQ8
SDRDQ6
SDRDQ9
SDRDQ5
SDRDQ4
SDRDQ3
DVDD1D
DVDD3D
SDRABP
SDRCAS
DVDD3A
DVDD3B
DVDD1A
DVDD1B
DVDD3C
DVDD1C
EMI
SCKSET
SDRCKE
SDRCLK
DVDD1E
IC102
SDRWE
SDRCS
I O
DGND1
DGND2
DGND3
DGND4
SDRA9
SDRA8
SDRA7
SDRA6
SDRA5
SDRA4
SDRA3
SDRA2
SDRA1
SDRA0
TEST1
TEST2
TP107 0.2 A0 A7 0.4
MM1561FFBE G
SDRA1 SDRA6
22
29
R102
3.3V REG 10k T P186 2.4 T P188 0.2 A1 A6 0.4
0.3 SDRA2 SDRA5
C215 C207 C205
23
28
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
4
220 1 1000p A2 A5
4V SDRA3 0.4 0.4 SDRA4
24
27
6
3.3
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
3.3
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.2
1.5
0.2
0.2
3.0
3.3
3.2
1.5
1.5
3.3
1.5
3.2
3.2
1.0
1.4
1.5
1.1
1.3
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.2
1.3
1.2
1.3
3.3
3
B+ 3.3 B+ B+ B+ C250 A3 A4
1000p 3.3
25
26
7
50V
2
C108 I C223 1 B+
R113 1 C122 C131 TP118 TP119 TP15 6
10k 6.3V 1000p 2.2 G C187 C20 2
X6S 50V 10V 1 1
B B
C206 C204 C203 C189 C235 C192 C19 9 C238
1 1000p 1 1000p C194 C236 C196 C237
1 0.1
C201 2 4 6 8
220 1 1 1000p 1 0.1 1
4V 50V 50V 16V 16V R167
R181 R180
G IC102 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
B
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
B
TP1155
F
2 4 6 8
F
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
100 100
1 3 5 7
100
1.5V REG
R154 R155 R156 R158 R160 R162 R165
TP1118
TP1120
TP1122
TP1119
TP1121
TP1123
100 100 100 100 R159 100 100 100
100
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
SIGNAL PATH TP1104
TP1100
TP1108
TP1106
TP1102
TP1101
TP1109
TP1110
TP1111
TP1112
TP1113
TP1114
TP1115
TP1116
TP1117
T P199
TP191
TP192
TP193
TP194
TP195
TP196
TP197
TP198
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDI O
TP1103
TP1105
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
SDRA0 TP1107
SDRDQ1 0
SDRDQ1 1
SDRDQ1 2
SDRDQ13
SDRDQ14
SDRDQ15
SDRDQ7
SDRDQ8
SDRDQ6
SDRDQ9
SDRDQ5
SDRDQ4
SDRDQ3
SDRDQ2
SDRDQ1
SDRDQ0
REC
SDRA10
SDRRAS
SDRW E
SDRABP
SDRCAS
SDRC S
SDRA9
SDRA8
SDRA7
SDRA6
SDRA5
SDRA4
SDRA3
SDRA2
SDRA1
PB
SDRCLK
H SDRCKE
VIDEO ENCODER
4-17 4-18 VDC-001
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ND201
FLUORESCENT TUBE DISPLAY
FR-274 BOARD
FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN FUNCTION SW
-REF.NO.: 30,000 SERIES-
A
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
10G
11G
12G
P9
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
1G
2G
3G
4G
5G
6G
7G
8G
9G
F1
F1
F2
F2
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 51 52
JL269
JL275
JL284
JL286
JL250
JL260
JL272
JL274
JL276
JL280
JL285
JL238
JL278
JL234
JL235
JL241
JL242
JL245
JL251
JL265
JL270
JL273
JL253
JL236
JL237
JL239
JL252
JL271
JL283
JL244
JL258
JL279
JL263
JL277
JL243
JL246
JL248
JL262
JL268
JL282
JL240
JL249
JL261
JL264
JL281
JL267
JL259
JL266
JL247
SEG1 6
SEG1 5
SEG1 4
SEG1 3
SEG1 2
SEG1 1
SEG1 0
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
GRD1 0
GRD1 1
GRD1 2
GRD1
GRD2
GRD3
GRD4
GRD5
GRD6
GRD7
GRD8
GRD9
L201 D210
100uH 1SS355TE-17
B+ JL223
GRD1
GRD2
GRD3
GRD4
GRD5
GRD6
GRD7
GRD8
GRD9
B Q201
2SD1898T100R D211
1SS355TE-17
DSC T201
DC-DC CONVERTER Q203
MM3Z6V2ST1
R209 C217
D216
10k TRANSFORMER C215 C216 0.1 2SB1197K-T-146-R
D208 0.1 22 50V 12V SWITCH
C201 1SS355TE-17 50V 50V B 11.8 11.8 B+ B+
100 B
25V C207 2 10
2700p C222
200V D209 0.01
-22.5
-22.5
-22.5
-22.5
-22.5
-22.5
-22.5
-22.5
-22.5
1SS355TE-17 R217 C211 16V
(RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950)
4.9
10k 0.1 B
3 1 JL224 11.1 B
D212
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
SDPB31H3C0100
Q202 R223
VD D
4 7
GR3
GR8
VSS
GR1
GR2
GR4
GR5
GR6
GR7
GR9
2SD1898T100R 2.7k
DSC JL254 GRD10
33
1
5 8 R231 LED1 GR10
R10.2/P0 2.2K JL255 -22.5 GRD11
HDD
32
2
LED2 GR11
R0/P5 JL256 R4.9/P0 -22.5 GRD12
R215
IC201
31
3
6 9 5.6k LED3 GR12
R232 JL257 R0/P5
C 0
-22.5
30
4
R227 LED4 FL DRIVE VEE
27k Q205 R0/P3.9
R233 100k -24.8 SEG16
29
5
DTC124EUA-T106 R3.5/P0
OSC SG16
LED DRIVE R235 0 2.8 IC201 -22.3 SEG15
28
6
DOU T PT6315 SG15
0 Q206 FLD T R250 47 0 -24.2 SEG14
27
7
DTC143TUA-T106 DI N SG14
4.9
LED DRIVE FLC K R251 47 0 -17.8 SEG13
26
8
CLK SG13
FLSTB R252 47 4.9 -24.2 SEG12
25
9
Q204 STB SG12
MUN2213T1 R236 10k 4.9 -24.2 SEG11
10
C213
24
SWITCH K1 SG11
0.1
R237 10k 0 -24.2 SEG10
11
23
K2 SG10
0 -17.8
VSS
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
SG6
SG7
SG8
SG9
VDD
D214
SLI-343YC3F
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
DVD
4.9
-22.2
SEG3 -22.3
-22.3
-22.3
-16.3
-22.3
-10.2
-10.3
-18.3
D
SEG1
SEG2
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
C221 C223
0.01 0.1
R225 16V 50V
270 B B
CN201 5P
JL201
TO
KEY2 5 CN203 17P
FL-178 JL202 JL20 6
BOARD
KEY1 4 17 FLPO N
CN106 JL203 JL20 7
THROUGH THE IR 3 16 IR
JL205 B+ JL20 8
FLR-010 FFC
GN D 2 15 V+12RI E
JL204 B+ B+ B+ JL20 9
(SEE PAGE 4-22) V +5F 1 14 V +5F
R201 R222 JL21 0
0 0 13 GND
FLD T JL21 1
12 FLDATA
FLCK JL21 2 TO
11 FLCLK AV-114/118
JL21 3
E D202
STZ6.8N-T146
FLSTB
JL21 4
10 FLSTB
BOARD(1/5)
CN105
R206 9 GND
0 JL21 5 THROUGH THE
8 HDD2 FAR-007 FFC
JL21 6
7 A_TV
R207
0
JL21 7 (SEE PAGE 4-6)
6 D_TV
R228 R238 R243 JL21 8
D203 10k 10k 10k
STZ6.8N-T146 5 DITV
JL21 9
4 PLTV
JL22 0
3 KEY1
J201 JL22 1
R205 2 KEY2
LINE 2 IN 0 JL22 2
3 4 D204 PROGRAM
3 4 S201 S203 S208 1 KEY3
STZ6.8N-T146
1 2
S VIDEO 1 2 CN202 11P CH+
5 6 2C JL225 OPEN/CLOSE REC_STOP
1 2C R244
SDET2 JL226 R229 R239
2.2k 2.2k 2.2k
F JL227
2
3
SDET2
GN D
S204
S209
CH-
7 INPUT_SELECT
VIDE O D205 2Y JL228
4 2Y TO R230
8 STZ6.8N-T146 JL229 AV-114/118 2.2k R240 R245
2.2k S210 2.2k
R213 5 GN D BOARD(1/5)
9 0 S213
R 2V JL230 CN106
10 6 2V R241
AUDI O FB201
THROUGH THE
HDD PLAY
0uH 3.3k
FB202 7
11 0uH GN D
FAR-006 FFC R246
L(MONO) 13
12
2L JL231
JL232
8 2L
S211 3.3k
SIGNAL PATH
9 GN D (SEE PAGE 4-6) R248
3.3k
D206 2R JL233
S207
R242
5.6k
STOP VIDEO SIGNAL
STZ6.8N-T146 10 2R
S212 AUDI O
11 GN D
DVD REC
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
REC
D207
STZ6.8N-T146 PB
G
C204 C206 R218 R220
220p 220p 220k 220k
1 2 3 4 5 6
FL-178 BOARD
DV,USB,REMOCON,RECEIVER,POWER,SW
A -REF.NO.: 30,000 SERIES-
RDR-HX750/HX950
CN101
6P
JL101
TPB N 6
JL102 FL101
TO 0uH
TPBP 5
RD-065
3
JL103
BOARD(6/7) GND 4
CN5101
GND 3 CN103
THROUGH THE JL104
4P
RV-003 HARNESS TPAP 2 TPB-
2
JL105
1
TPAN 1 TPB+ DV IN
(SEE PAGE
2
TPA-
4-36)
3
TPA+
4
B
IC101
4
3
FL102 REMOTE CONTROL
0uH RECEIVER
IC101
C102 L104 GP1UM27XK0SF
1 0uH
GND
OUT
VCC
R109
33
4.9
4.9
D- VFB CN105
4P
2 1 C111
Pict Bridge 100
16V (POWER) CN106
USB 5P
JL117 TO
3 4 B type C107 S101
1 KEY2
C CN102
10P
USBDP 1
JL108
R105
33 D+ GND
0.01
JL118
2 KEY1
FR-274
BOARD
1 JL119 CN201
JL107 3 IR
GND THROUGH THE
2 R113 JL121
JL106 VDR102 VDR104 0 FLR-010 FFC
4 GND
USBDM 1 JL120
3 L105 B+
GND
0uH 5 V +5F (SEE PAGE 4-19)
TO 4 R112
JL110 0
RD-065 V+5USB
BOARD(6/7) 5 L102 CN104
JL109 B+ 0uH V+5 4P
CN5201 USBVFB
1
6 R108
THROUGH THE JL112 33 D-
USBDM 2 S102
2
7
RV-001 HARNESS C101 1
GND D+ ONE_TOUCH_DUB
3
8 R104
(SEE PAGE USBDP 2
JL111 33 GND USB
A type
4
9
4-34) L103
GND 0uH
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RD-065 BOARD(1/7)
POWER BLOCK
-REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- C 4511 V +1R0 B+
4.7 V+1R 0
6.3V
B+ TP4502 TP4503 B V +2R5 B+
B+
A C 4507
C 4501
1
C 4535
1000p
V+3A B+
V+2R 5
5
1
CN4501 13P X6 S VI N VOUT V+3V TO (2/7)
C 4508 C 4502 C 4536 3.3V REG V+5D B+
220 1 1000p C456 3
2
EV+5.8 V 1 NC VI N GND V+5D
4V 6.3V 50V 1
X6S B 6.3V V+1R5_IN B+
NB
4
GND D 2 VSS CONT X6S V+1R5_IN
TP4506 TP4507
IC4561
5
SW+1.53V 3 ON/OFF VOUT GND D
C 4509 C 4537 C 4503 R4511
SW+1.53V 4 220 1000p 1 0 5V REG
B+ 4V 50V 6.3V
B+ V+3V
B X6S
TO GND D 5 C 4567 IC4562
SWITCHING TP4508 TP4509 C 4524
4.7 C 4513 TP4608 1 S-1112B33MC-L6STFG
REGURATOR SW+3.33V 6 6.3V 4.7 6.3V P_CONT2
B 6.3V X6S
CN201 C 4504 B V+3D TP6096 B+ V+3HD V+1R5_IN B+
0.1
5
1
THROUGH THE SW+3.33V 7 VI N VOUT V+1R5_IN
B+ 16V
V +12A B+
PR-076 HARNESS F
C 4570
2
GND D 8 IC4521 GND
1
V +12A
B+ TP4510 TP4511 S-1170B25UC-OTKTFG 6.3V V+3D B+
(SEE PAGE 4-38)
IC4521
4
V +12V 9 R4521 CONT NB X6S V+3D
R4501
RB501V-40TE-17
B GND 10
0 TP4501 C 4539
1000p C 4505
IC4502
2.5A C 4515
6.8k
NC VI N IC4562 V+5_AI N B+
V+5_AIN 2
4
50V 1 32V 47 2.5V REG B+
D4521
B 6.3V V+5_AO
V+5M 11 6.3V 3.3V REG TO (3/7)
VSS V+5_AO
2
X6S
TP4514 V+5_VI B+
GND M 12 ON/OFF VOUT V+5_VI
5
TP4512 TP4513 TP4571 C 4526 V+5_VO B+
V12M 13 15k RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950 V+5_VO
B+
C 4540
1000p
C 4506
0.1
I C4501
2.5A
32V C 4516
10
R4504 R4505 R4507
C 4522 C 4525
V +2R5
IC4571 GND D
16V 2.7k 2.7k 2.7k
50V 16V 1 4.7 R4574 1.8V REG GNDA
B F 6.3V 6.3V R4575
X6S B B+ 0 0 V+1R8
4
R4531 B
IC4531 C4572 C4573
4.7
S-1132B18-U5T1G
0 220
ON/OFF
VI N
NC2 GND
3
C 4534
10 1.0V REG C 4571
C
IC4571
NC3 NC1 10V
2
4.7
C 6.3V V +1R8 B+
VI N VOUT B V+1R 8
VS S
C 4531
VOUT
1
C 4533 V+3D B+ 4
NC
1 V+3D
6.3V 6.3V
X6S X6S TO (5/7)
3 2 1 GND D
B+ V+5M
B+ V+12M V+3D B+
V+3D
TP4610 B+ V+3A B+ TP4570 B+ V +12A V+3HD B+
IC4541 V+3HD
C 4543
MM1563DFBE 1000p V+5HD B+ 5
R4541 50V R5445 R4581 V+5HD
0 B TP4567 0 100 Q4581
B+ V+5D 2SC4081T106R EV+5.8V B+ TO (6/7)
4
CONT CN EV+5.8V
1.2V REG
3
SUB GND L 4551 GND D
B+ 10uH B+ V+5_AO
C 4585 C 4586
2
VI N NC 0.1 100
16V 16V
C 4541 F
1
R4559 VO R4552
1
D 0 6.3V
X6S
C 4542
2.2
10V
0 B+ V+5_AIN V+3D B+
V+3D
B V+3A B+
R4554 V+3A
0 B+ V+5_VI V+5L B+
IC4541 R4553
V+5M B+
V+5L
V+5M
6
3V REG 0 B+ V+5_VO V+12M B+ TO (7/7)
V+12M
D4552 R4556
RB501V-40TE-17 0
GND D
B+ B+ V+5L
GND M
IC4552 IC4552
S-1170B50UC-OUJTFG
C 4553
5V REG C 4558 C 4559
100 100 1000p
16V 16V 50V
5
1
ON/OFF VOUT B
C 4555 TP4568
4.7
2
VSS
6.3V
B R4558 C 4556
E
3
NC VIN C 4557
22k 4.7
6.3V
B
0.01
16V
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
B
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
POWER BLOCK
RD-065 (1/7) 4-23 4-24
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
B+
RD-065 BOARD(2/7) B+
EMMA BLOCK B+
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- C1044 C1045
2P 2p (AS,BS)
1P 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
L 1831 R1812
220 B+ 1P (CS,DS)
IC1301
IC1302
NJM12904V(TE2)
NJM12904V(TE2)
O EM I I C 1812 C 1045 C 1044
+
C 1811 R1301
-
VREF V OUT
L 1821 R1802 G 2.2 1
* 50V
* 470
IC1301
IC1302
B+ C1312 R1312
B+
O EM I I
C 1802 C 1801
220 10V
B
6.3V
X6S
R1814 R1813
50V
CK CK
C 1301
2.2
10V
C 1302
0.1
16V
0.5% C 1315
2.2
10V
B
0.1
16V
F
1k
0.5%
VREF D OUT
SIGNAL PATH
G 2.2 1 B F
L 1811 15uH 33 330
+
10V 6.3V
-
B X6S R1302 VIDEO SIGNAL
C 1814 C 1813
1k
0.5% 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
AUDI O
R1804 R1803 150p 100p Q1811
L 1801 39uH 33 330 50V 50V ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
FSC BPF X 1002
X 1001
C 1804
330p
C 1803
220p
Q1801 24.576MHz 27MHz X101
TP1202
REC
VREF_D 16.9344MHz
VREF_D 50V 16V ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
CH HCL BPR R1303 C 1303
R193
A T/XDT 1k 0.1 C 1316 R1314 C 1313 PB
VREF_D
B AT/XDT
0
R114
0.5% 16V
F
10
10V
R1313
1k
0.5%
0 0.1
16V
7 HADRS7
33k
C F
HADRS7
TO (4/7) HADRS6
HADRS6
HADRS5
HADRS5
C 1304 R1030 R1031
1080P
10
XDVI
C 1805 C 1815 47 100 220 (AS,BS)
TXD0_LL
SPDIFSEL
RXD0_LL
0.047 0.047 6.3V
10V 10V 47 150 (CS,DS)
TO
B B (3/7,4/7)
TP1201
8 XRESET
TO 1080P
(3/7,4/7,5/7,7/7) 1080P
AOD0
AOBCK
AOLRCK
DACCLKO
ADCCLKO
NSCS
AIBCK0
AILRCK0
AIBD0
SPDIFO
SMCKOUT
SMDOUT
SMDIN
RXD1
XDVI
XDVI 11
JTC L
JTDI
EDIN T
JTMS
JTDO
JTMRS T
C 1058 C1027 TXD0_LL
0.01 C1028 SCL_VDEC TO (6/7)
R5856 0.1 0.1
16V R1013 10k 10V RXD0_LL
B 10k B 10V
B SDA_VDEC
VIOCLK
VIOD7
VIOD6
VIOD5
VIOD4
VIOD3
VIOD2
VIOD1
VIOD0
AIOBD
C
AIOBCK
AIOLRCK
R1181
B+ R1001
R1029
10k
R1030
R1031
82
10k
R1068
47k
* *
CN470 1
28P
K2
AG23
AG22
AF1
G2
K20
K23
AF21
L1
AC20
AB21
L20
L21
L24
H19
H20
G19
H21
M24
AE1
D18
AF22
F21
SP1ERRB/GPIO20 AD20
J19
J21
J22
J24
AD23
AD24
A T/XDT
AB22
AC22
AC24
AB20
AE21
AF23
Y19
AA20
AE20
AE24
AF24
K5
L3
L4
L5
AOBCK C19
AIOMCK0 C20
AOD0 E18
E20
AIBCK0 E19
AIOMCK1 E21
ATX D19
D20
AILRCK0 F19
K4
K3
28 AT/XDT
HCBP
HLCO
FSCO
JTMS
JTDO
FCBP
CLK24OUT
CLK27AOUT
XA2
TXD0B
RXD0B
HLCI
CLKPWM1/VIFLD/GPIO61
JTRST
JTCL
SMDOUT/SS0DOUT
AOLRCK
AIOLRCKSP0ERRB/GPIO30
SMCKOUT/SS0CKIN
CLK24IN
RXD1B/GPIO38
SP0REQB/GPIO33
AIOBCK/SP0CLK/GPIO31
NMI
RSTSWB
EDINT
FSCI
AIOBD/SP0STRT/GPIO32
VIOCLK/SP0EN/GPIO21
AIBD0
SP1EN/SS1EN/GPIO09
VIOD7/SP0DAT7/GPIO29
VIOD6/SP0DAT6/GPIO28
VIOD5/SP0DAT5/GPIO27
DCD0B/SS0SB/GPIO47
JTDI
SP1CLK/SS1CLK/GPIO08
CLKPWM0/GPIO60
VIOD4/SP0DAT4/GPIO26
VIOD3/SP0DAT3/GPIO25
VIOD2/SP0DAT2/GPIO24
VIOD1/SP0DAT1/GPIO23
VIOD0/SP0DAT0/GPIO22
CLK27AIN
XA1
TXD1B/GPIO39
CLK27BIN/GPIO6
SMDIN/SS0DIN
R4717 R4716 R470 9 R470 8 27 GND
10k 10k 10k 10k R4732
4.7k
CN1401 14P 26 SDA_VDEC
TRST 14
R1401 TP1401
22 JTMRS T IC4702 C 4702
CS R4715
10k IC4702 R4707 25 SCL_VDEC
R1414 TP1402 TC7SZ08FU(TE85R) R4713 R4731
22 HADRS7 BUFFER 1 10k 10k 4.7k
EJSNGEN 13 6.3V 24 GND
R1402 TP1403 X6S R4727 TP6045
22 JTDI 10k
TDI 12 VCC INB 23 TX1
1
TP1430 R4728 TP6048
AB23 V19 C 4705 10k
GND 11 SP1STRT/SS1STRT/GPIO10 VIVSB/RTS0B/GPIO36 1000p IN A 22 RX1
2
R1403 TP1429 50V
22 JTDO W19 U19 ADPOW VIOCLK B
TDO 10 SP1REQB/SS1ERRB/GPIO11 VIHSB/CTS0B/GPIO37 OUTY GND 21 GND
3
R1415 TP1406 R4723 R4729 TP6103
22 HADRS6 AH24 F17 AMUTE 0
DINTEN CSYNC/GPIO54 47
9 SP1DAT0/SS1DAT/GPIO12 20 XRESET
R1404 TP1404 C101 7
JTMS
D (FOR CHECK)
TMS 8
22 AG24
SP1DAT1/SS0CLK/GPIO13 VRBB
D24 0.1
10V 19 GND(RFE/XLL)
AC21 C23 B C 1016 C 4701
GND 0.1 1 IC4701
7 SP1DAT2/SS0EN/GPIO14 VCOMB 10V 18 GND
R1405 TP1405 C101 5 B 6.3V R4703 TP6063
22 JTCL AE22 C24 X6S TC74VCX245FK 100
TCK 0.1
6 SP1DAT3/SSOSTRT/GPIO15 VRTB 10V 17 VCLKI
AE23 F24 B C 1035 C 4704 R4701
0.1 TO VDC-001
20
GND 5 SP1DAT4/SS0ERRB/GPIO16 VRBR 1000p VCC DIR 16 GND
1
R1406 TP1407 10V 50V 100 BOARD
JTRS T C103 3 B TP6056
22 AD22 G21 0.1 R4721 B CN104
19
RST 4 SP1DAT5/SS0DAT/GPIO17 VCOMR OE A1 15 STREAM_7
2
R1416 TP1408 10V 100
22 HADRS5 AD21 F22 B C 1032 VIOD7 TP6057 THROUGH THE
0.1
18
JTSEL 3 SP1DAT6/GPIO18 VRTR B1 A2 14 STREAM_6
3
R1407 TP1409 10V FVR-001 FFC
EDIN T C102 9 B VIOD6 TP6058
22 AC23 G23 0.1
17
DINT 2 SP1DAT7GPIO19 VRBC B2 A3 13 STREAM_5
4
10V C 1030
TP1414 B+ B VIOD5 TP6059
H22 0.1 (SEE PAG
16
V+3 1 VCOMC B3 A4 12 STREAM_4
5
10V
C 1401 C121 C103 1 B VIOD4 TP6060
R1412 R1411 R1413 0.01 AF15 G22 0.1
15
2200p CBPD VRTC B4 A5 11 STREAM_3
6
10k 10k 47k 16V 10V
50V
B B+ C122 AG15 E22 B C 1047 VIOD3 TP6061
VRBY 0.1
14
CBBD B5 A6 10 STREAM_2
7
2200p 10V
50V C125 C103 4 B VIOD2 TP6069
1 AF18 D21 0.1
13
CEQDC VCOMY B6 A7 9 STREAM_1
8
6.3V R116 10V
C127 X6S 3.3k B C 1018 VIOD1 TP6062
0.047 AH19 VRTY D22 0.1
12
CDEF2 B7 A8 8 STREAM_0
9
10V R119 10V
B C128 0 AG19 VCLY E23
C101 9 B VIOD0
0.1 0.1 R4702
11
C1421
10
CDEF B8 GD 7 GND
E R1421
10k
R1422
10k
1
6.3V
C129
1
10V
AJ17 AB19
10V
B X525P
R4722
R4704
0
100
TP6066
X6S 6.3V CEQ CTS1B/TTXRQ/GPIO41 6 ALRCKI
C 1020 100 R4705 TP6067
X6S R109 AJ18 D23 GI 0
REQ 10 5 ADATA
CN1402 7P 6.2k ABI 16V
TP1410 TP1411 C130 R4706 TP6068
BI
TXD 1
TP1412 TP1413 RXD
4.7
6.3V
2012 C131
AF16
AF17
C
CAG ARI
F23
G24 C/RI
IC4701 C 4703
1
IC4703
TC74VHC125FK
0
4 ABCKI
14
DTR 3 CMIRR AYI VCC 1G 2 SPDIF
1
10V R124
TP1425 B C134 0 AF14 B20
0.1
13
(FOR CHECK) CTS 4 CAMIRR COMP1 C 1001 4G 1A 1 GND
2
10V 0 . 1 10V B
TP1426 B+ B C135
0.01 AH18 B24 C 4706
12
V+5D 5 AGCIN COMP0 C 1002 1000p 4A 1Y TP6065
3
16V 0 . 1 10V B
TP1427 B 50V
R110 AG18 B22 C1006
IC4703 B
11
GNDD 6 1k RFO VREF 1 6.3V X6S 4Y 2G
4
C136
TP1428 232RST
0.1
T P131 AE17
IC1001 (1/5) A21 R1003
10
XRESET 7 CRC RSET1 680 BUFFER 3G 2A
5
10V 0.5%
C137 B
6800p AE16 AV ENC/DEC A23 R1004
9
CTEC RSET0 R4726 3A 2Y
6
16V 470
C144 0.5% PB/BOUT AIOBCK 22
0.01 AE18 A24
CBHLPP/CRAPC
8
VAB 3Y GND
7
16V
C145 B Y/GOUT
0.01 AF13 VAG B23
16V CBHWBL/CID IC1001
B C146 MC10050F1-105-LU1-A(AS,BS) PR/ROUT
F C147 C
10
10V
AG11
CREG MC10050F1-505-LU1-A(CS,DS) VAR
A22
R4725
22
AE15 B21 COUT AIOBD
0.33 CBC
6.3V VAC
B C148 AE14 YOUT AIOLRCK
0.33 CAD VAY A20
6.3V
C155 B R4724 R4712 R4711 R4710
0.47 AE12 22 CS
CWAGC 10k 10k 10k
6.3V
B C156 AE13 DGNDR K19
1800p CWHP
50V
C157 AF12 R4720 R4719 R4718 E
0.01 CADO N15 B+
16V DVDD33R 10k 10k 10k
B C158 AG12 Y15
0.01 CBCO AGND
16V
B
AGND Y14
C107 SPDIFO_LL
680p AG13 WALPF AGND Y13
50V YOUT
R104 B AJ16 YOUT
12k EXTR AGND Y12 COUT
C113 AD16 B+ COUT
4700p AH15 PCEFM2
50V AVDD33 PR/ROUT
C114 AD15 PR/ROUT
4700p AJ15
PCEFM1 AVDD33 Y/GOUT
50V
C115 AD14 B+ Y/GOU T
0.01 AH14 FCEFM2 AVDD33 PB/BOUT
G 16V
B AJ14 FCEFM1
AD13 PB/BOUT
AVDD33 R273 YI
C116
C120 AD12 0 B+ YI
0.1 AH13
0.1 10V ASY AVDD15 C/RI
10V R105
B 0 C103 C104 C106 C105 C152 C159 C154 C153 C/R I
B AJ13 M6 R274 220 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 0.1 1 10
IC1001-AJ2 EFM DLL_GND 0 4V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 16V 6.3V 16V BI
C117 AH17 L6 X6S F B B F X6S BI
9 1000p C100
1000p RFI_P DLL_VDD L 1004 GI
50V
B 50V AH16 A19 GI
TO (7/7) GNDS B RFI_M DA2_GND O EMI I X525P
C101 T P117 R271
Q102 AG16 C22 0 X525P
1000p RFEQOM G
50V DA1_GND AMUTE
RT1N141U-TP-1 T P118 B+ AMUTE
SWITCH B AG17 B19 C1051 C1052 C 1053 C164 C167 C162 C163
RFEQOP DA2_VDD3 10 1 1000p 1000p 0.1 1 220 ADPOW
10V 6.3V 50V 50V 16V 6.3V 4V
ADPOW
C21 C X6 S B F X6S
DA1_VDD3 ADCCLKO
T P119 AF20 H24 ADCCLKO
TEO/LE/SWRF1/SWRF3/RFP6 AD2_GND L 1024 DACCLKO 11
T P122 AF19 B+ DACCLKO
M23 TO (3/7)
FEO/LE/SWRF2/SWRF4/RFP5 AD1_GND AILRCK0
C 1005 C 1004 C 1003 O EMI I
T P123 AE19 H23 1000p 1 100 AILRCK0
ADIN/LE/RFP4 AD2_VDD3 B+ 50V 6.3V 4V
G
AIBCK0
L1023
T P128 AD18 X6S AIBCK0
MONI1/RFPM1 L23
AD1_VDD3 O EMI I AIBD0
TP6119 AD19 C 1041 C 1040 C 1039 AIBD0
H MONI2/RFPM2 PH_GND L22 1000p
50V
1
6.3V
X6S
100
4V
G
AOLRCK
TP6120 AC19 J20 B+ AOLRCK
MONI3/SWRF4/RFPM3 PH_VDD1
L1025 AOBCK
M10 K21 AOBCK
TEST_MODE HC_VDD3 AOD0
C102 5 C1024 O EMI I
M11 C1026 AOD0
TP1001
J23 1 100 G
FPIND PF_GND 1000p 6.3V 4V SPDIFO
50V X6S SPDIFO
M12 K24
LVSPOWD PF_VDD1 SMDIN
AD17 K22 SMDIN
TEST1 FC_VDD3 SMDOUT
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD10(1.0V)
DVDD15(1.5V)
DVDD15(1.5V)
DVDD15(1.5V)
DVDD15(1.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD25(2.5V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
DVDD33(3.3V)
B+ L100 3
B+ SMDOUT
O EMI SMCKOUT
PLL_GND
PLL_VDD
L1005 I
SMCKOUT
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
15uH G
L1022 NSCS
TP1002 NSCS
O EM I RXD1
W10
M13
M14
M15
P10
P11
P12
R10
R11
N24
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
L10
T10
T11
L11
L12
L13
L14
L15
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
K10
K11
Y10
Y11
F10
F11
K12
K13
K14
K15
AA6
AB6
W6
B+ RXD1
P6
R6
N6
U6
G6
G7
H6
J6
A1
T6
V6
Y6
K6
K1
L2
F7
F8
F9
G
V+5D JTRS T
B+ JTRST
V+3A RXD
L 1002
B+ B+ B+ RXD
V+1R0 232RST
O EM I I L 1021
B+ B+ G B+ 232RST
V+2R5
L 1001 O EMI
I 1
V+3D
B+ B+ B+ G
I
TO (1/7) O EM I I
B+ G
V+3V B+
B+
V+1R5_IN
GNDD
C1009 C1010 C1062 C1063 C1064 C1065 C1007 C1008 C1059 C1060 C1061 C101 4 C1012 C1013 C 1066 C 1067 C 1068 C 1011 C1049 C104 8 C 1050 C 1038 C 1037 C 1036 C 1023 C 1022 C 1021
220 1 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 220 1 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 100 1 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 1000p 1 100 1000p 1 100 1000p 1 10
4V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 4V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 4V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 50V 6.3V 4V 50V 6.3V 4V 50V 6.3V 10V
X6 S X6S F X6 S X6S F X6 S X6S F X6S X6S X6S C
EMMA BLOCK
4-25 4-26 RD-065 (2/7)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
C 2501
R2501 1
680 6.3V
X6S Y_OUT
RD-065 BOARD(3/7)
Q2501
VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK YOUT ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
VIDEO BUFFER
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- R2502
150
0.5% C250 2
1
6.3V
IC3201 X6S
R2504
AUDIO DAC 680 CN2301 40P
R2304
C_OUT 0 TP2304
40 X525P
B+ YP_OUT TP2301
IC3201 COUT
Q2502 39 YP_OUT * MARKED:MOUNTED TEBLE
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 38 GND
AS,BS CS,DS
PCM1742KE R3229 R3228 VIDEO BUFFER
R3201 R3234 10k 10k R2505 CR_OUT TP2302
AOBCK 47 0 DACCLKO 150 37 CR_OUT C3303 15p/50V 5p/50V
0.5% C250 3
16
MCLK
1
BCKIN
R3233 1
R3202
0
R3206 6.3V 36 GND C3304 82p/50V 68p/50V
AOD0 47 47 NSCS X6S CB_OUT TP2303
R2506
15
ML
2
DATA 0 35 CB_OUT C3305 22p/50V 15p/50V
R3203 R3207 R2507
AOLRCK 47 47 SMCKOUT 680 34 GND
C3311 XX 7p/50V
14
MC TP2305
3
LRCKIN YP_OUT Y_OUT
R3208 33 Y_OUT
47 R3310 C3312 XX 7p/50V
SMDOUT *
B
13
MD
4
GND 32 GND
R3230 Q2503 TP2306
B+ 0 Y/GOUT
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
C_OUT C3313 0.01u/50V 10u/10V
31 C_OUT
VIDEO BUFFER R3337
12
V+3D ZEROL D3201
5
VDD R2508 C3314 XX 7p/50V
DAN202uT106 R3204 150 30 GND
B+ 0.5% C250 4 TP2307
0 AMUTE 1 Y_IN * C3315 XX 7p/50V
11
V+5_AO ZEROR
6
VCC 6.3V 29 Y_IN
C 3206 SMCKOUT X6S
R3302 C3316 XX 5p/50V
0.1 28 GND
16V
*
10
COM TP2308
7
VOUTR 26 GND
9
C3318 XX 15p/50V
C 3201 C 3202
C 3219
220
C 3220
1
C 3203
1000p
C 3207
47 G_IN * TP2309
25 G_I N
1000 0.1 4V 6.3V 50V 6.3V C3319 0.01u/50V 10u/10V
6.3V 16V X6S PB/BOU T Q2504 R3232 0
F ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 24 GND
VIDEO BUFFER R3341 TP2310 C3320 XX 7p/50V
C 3204
330p
R2511
150
B_IN * 23 B_IN
50V 0.5% C250 5 R3342 C3321 XX 7p/50V
GNDA 1
6.3V
* 22 GND TO AV-114/118
TP3201 TP3202 X6S LCHOUT TP2311 BOARD (1/5 )
CN101 C3322 XX 5p/50V
21 L_OUT
R2513 TP2312 THROUGH THE
680 20 GNDA C3323 XX 68p/50V
C V+5_VO
B+ B+ CR_OUT RCHOUT TP2313
19 R_OUT
F RA-006 FFC
C3324 XX 15p/50V
B+ AMUTE1 R2302 0 TP2314 (SEE PAGE 4-6)
V+5_VI 18 AMUTE C3325 0.01u/50V 10u/10V
Q2505 TP2315
PR/ROU T ISA1602AM1TP-1EF RCHIN
P_CONT2 17 R_IN
VIDEO BUFFER C3329 XX 5p/50V
B+ R2514 C 2506
V+1R5_IN 150 10 16 GND
2 B+ LCHOUT
0.5% 10V
C LCHI N TP2317 C3330 XX 68p/50V
V+5_AIN 15 L_IN
TO R3224
(1/7)
C3331 XX 15p/50V
100
14 GND
R2301 3.3k TP2319 C3333 XX 1u/50V
B+ 13 P_CONT2
B+ TP2320
8
1
470 11 XRST1
2
C 3213 10 R3004 0
3
8 DAT_TO_M
4
C3341 XX 1u/50V
C 3214 R3221 C 3332 * C3303 C3304 C 3305 R3301 SMCKOUT R3003 0 TP2325
D R3216
1.2k
0.5%
R3217
10k
0.5%
560p
50V
100 AUDIO LPF 1
6.3V
X6S
R3309
680
* * *
47
HST_TO_M R3007 0 TP2326
7 ASCK
L3303 XX 18uH
6 HST_TO_M
B+ Q3301 TU_DSDA R3008 0 TP6105 L3304 XX 10uH
V +12A ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 5 DSDA
R3220 Y EQ TU_CEC R3009 0 TP6106 L3305 XX 18uH
100 4 CEC
Q3304 C3312 C3311 TU_DSCL R3010 0 TP6107
R3344 L3306 XX 10uH
C 3211 C 3212
C 3218 C 3217
100 0.1
* * * * DDC_SW1 R3011 0 TP6100
3 DSCL
R3215 0.1 C3339 L3307 XX 18uH
R3213 R3214 22k 100 16V 16V C3333 2 DDC_SW1
680 6.8k 16V 16V F
F * R3314
L3303 L3304
R3312 * TU_HPD R3012 0 TP6108
1 HDP L3308 XX 10uH
* *
C/RI
R3313
* * C/R_IN
C2305
R3005 1 Q3303 XX ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
GNDD C3313 R3315 * C3329 C3330 C3331 Q3303
10k 6.3V
X6S
680 Q3304 XX 2SC4154TP-1EF
* * * * * TP2327 TP2329 TP233 1
Q3306 XX 2SC4154TP-1EF
IC3101 Q3306 C3314 C3315
R3101
A K5358AET-E2 IC3101 * * *
R3317
* TU_HPD
TU_HPD
Q3307 XX ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
E RCHIN 0 AUDIO ADC
C3334
* R3319 R3318
C3340
*
DDC_SW 1
Q3308 XX 2SC4154TP-1EF
16
TU_CEC
(6/7)
B+
R3113
10k
C3319 R3320
680
* C3316 C3317 C3318 Q3305
TU_DSD A
TU_CEC R3307 1.8k 0.5% 5.6k 0.5%
* * * * *
14
R3310 10k XX
R3103
C 3105 0 ADPOW
0.1 R3312 XX 470 0.5%
13
VCOM PDN
4
16V 14
F R3107 Q3308 C3320 C3321 HSMTOT
47 AIBCK0 R3322 R3313 XX 5.6k 0.5%
* * * * TO
12
VA MCLK *
6
C 3104 R3108 BI
1 47 AILRCK0 R3325
6.3V C 3103 R3318 XX 470 0.5%
10
VD LRCK X525P
7
100
X6S
16V R3109
C3325 R3327
680
* C3322 C3323 C3324 Q3307
SPDIFO
C 3701 R3738
47 AIBD0 * * * * * BI SPDIFO R3319 XX 10
0.01 DGND SDTO BI
9
8
10k GI
16V GI
B R3105 R C/RI R3322 XX 330
1M 3106 C/RI
F B+
10k YI
PR/ROUT
PB/BOUT
YI
PR/ROUT
R3323 XX 470 0.5%
IC3707 Y/GOU T PB/BOUT
PST3813UL Y/GOUT R3324 XX 5.6k 0.5%
COUT
YOUT COUT
AMUTE YOUT R3325 XX 5.6k 0.5%
4 GND OUT 1 SMDOUT AMUTE
C 3108 C 3107 C 3106 R3716 SMDOUT R3326 XX 10
C3738 33 SMCKOUT
220 1 1000p RDR-HX650/HX750/HX750 NSCS SMCKOUT
4V 6.3V 50V 1 2
3 NC VDD NSCS 12
10
TO
SPDIFSEL
X6S
IC5701 R3715
6.3V
IC3707
DACCLKO
AOBCK
AOD0
DACCLKO
AOBCK TO
R3336 0 47
TC7WH34FU(TE12R)
2
1 1B 4B 232RST JTRST
6.3V 232RST
G DAT_TO_M
X6S RDR-GX350
R5702
12
3
1
3Y 1Y 2A 4Y
Q5701
HST_TO_M RXD SPDIFO_LL 2SC4154TP-1EF
10
5
3
2A 3A 2B 3B DIGITAL OPUT
R3705 L5701
IC3702
TC7SH08FU(T5RSOYJF)
100 0uH
TP609 4
JA5701
SIGNAL PATH
6
9
4
GND 2Y 2Y 3A
C 3705 R5701 DIGITAL OUT
1000p 470 R5703 R5706 TP609 5
50V 680 75
C 5704 COAXIAL
1 VIDEO SIGNAL
7
GND 3Y
1
C 3704 100k
10 R3708
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
IC3701
3
10V 10k
C 3706 C 3707 C
1000p 1
50V 6.3V
BUFFER
REC
B X6S C570 7 C5705 C 5708 C 5702 C5706
1 1000 p 220 1 1000p
50V
B+
6.3V
X6S B
4V 6.3V
X6S
50V
B
PB
H IC3702
AND GATE
VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK
RD-065 (3/7) 4-27 4-28
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
MD 2 C280
K4S641632K-UC60T MD2
MD3
AB1
MD2 DADD02
C5 DADRS2
DADRS3
IC1201 C1215
1 AA5 B5
DDR SDRAM
54
VSS3 DADD03 100
1
6.3V VDD1 MD3 C1235 4V
MD 5 MD 0 X6S MD15 MD4 AB3 E1 DADRS4 10 B+
53
DQ15 DADD04 10V
2
DQ0 MD4 IC1201
C287
MD5 DADRS5
C B+ K4H511638C-UCB3T C 1204
1 AA3 E2 1
52
DADD05
3
6.3V VDDQ1 VSSQ4 MD5 6.3V
MD 1 X6S MD14 MD6 DADRS6 C 1202 X6S
W4 D1
66
51
DADD06 1
4
R319 DQ14 R318
1
DQ1 MD6 VDD1 VSS3
33 33 6.3V
MD 2 MD13 MD7 DADRS7 R1241 R1248
B Y4 D2 R1245 X6S R1255
65
50
DADD07
5
DQ13 0 0
2
DQ2 MD7 22 DQ0 DQ15 22
C285 MD8 DADRS8 R1281 DDATA0 C 1203 DDATA2 3
1 W5 D3 0.1
64
49
6
47
3
VSSQ1 VDDQ4 6.3V MD8 DADD08 16V VDDQ1 VSSQ5
MD 3 X6S MD12 MD9 W3 E4 DADRS9 DADRS5 TADRS5 DDATA1 F DDATA2 2
63
48
7
DQ14
4
DQ3 DQ12 MD9 DADD09 DQ1
MD 4 MD11 MD10 TP160 Y5 C4 DADRS10 DADRS9 TADRS9 DDATA2 DDATA2 1
62
47
8
DQ13
5
DQ4 DQ11 MD10 DADD10 DQ2
C281 C 1205
1 MD11 Y2 D4 DADRS11 DADRS0 TADRS0 DDATA3 0.01 DDATA2 0
61
VSSQ3
46
9
VDDQ5
6
6.3V VDDQ2 MD11 DADD11 VSSQ1 16V
MD 5 X6S MD10 MD12 DADRS12 DADRS1 TADRS1 B
AC2 E5
10
60
45
R320 R317 DQ12
7
DQ5 DQ10 MD12 DADD12 DQ3
MD 6 33 33 MD 9 MD13 DDATA0
AB5 F5 R1242 R1246 R1256 R1249
11
59
44
0 22 22
8
DQ6 DQ9 MD13 DQ00 DQ4 DQ11 0
C288 C290 C 1216
0.1 MD14 AA1 F4 DDATA1 DDATA4 DDATA1 9
0.1 1
12
58
43
9
16V VSSQ2 VDDQ3 16V MD14 DQ01 6.3V VDDQ2 VSSQ4
F R1282
MD 7 F MD 8 MD15 Y1 G5 DDATA2 47 DDATA5 X6S DDATA1 8
13
10
57
42
C282 DQ7 DQ8 MD15 DQ02 DADRS4 TADRS4 DQ5 DQ10
1 MA0 AE3 G4 DDATA3 DDATA6 DDATA1 7
14
11
56
41
6.3V VDD2 VSS2 MA0 DQ03 DADRS6 TADRS6 DQ6 DQ9
X6S R206
LDQM C284 CAS Z 33 DDATA4 DDATA7 C 1210 DDATA1 6
1 AD3 J4 1000p
15
12
55
40
LDQM N.C/RFU MA1 DQ04 DADRS10 TADRS10 VSSQ2 VDDQ4
6.3V 50V
WE Z X6S UDQ M MA11 AF3 J5 DDATA5 B
16 UDQM
13
54
39
WE R281 MA2 DQ05 DADRS3 TADRS3 DQ7 DQ8
CAS Z 0 MCLK RAS Z AE5 H4 DDATA6
17
38
14
53
CAS CLK MA3 DQ06 NC1 NC6
C RAS Z MCKE MA2 AE4 H5 DDATA7
C 1206
0.01
18
37
15
52
RAS CKE MA4 DQ07 R1243 16V VDDQ3 VSSQ3 R1257 R1250
R210 R1247 22
C291 MA5 DDATA8 DDQS0 0 22 B 0 DDQS2
1000p 33 AD2 A8 R1283
19
36
16
51
CS N.C MA5 DQ08 LDQS UDQS
50V R205 47
MB A B MA11 MA6 33 AD1 B8 DDATA9 DADRS11 TADRS11 C 1213
20
35
17
50
BA0 A11 MA6 DQ09 NC2 NC5 0.1
C 1207 16V
MA 9 MA3 AC5 C8 DDATA1 0 DADRS2 TADRS2 F
1000p
21
34
18
49
BA1 A9 MA7 DQ10 50V VDD2 VREF
MA10 MA 8 MA4 AD4 A7 DDATA1 1 DADRS7 TADRS7 B
22
33
19
48
A10/AP A8 R202 MA8 DQ11 R1244 R1240 NC VSS2 R1258 R1251
MA 0 MA 7 MA7 33 DDATA1 2 DADRS8 TADRS8 DDM 0 33 22 22 33 DDM 2
AC1 B6
23
32
20
47
A0 A7 MA9 DQ12 LDM UDM
MA 1 MA 6 MA10 AC3 A6 DDATA1 3 TW E TCLKNO
24
31
21
/WE
46
A1 A6 MA10 DQ13 /CK
R203
MA 2 MA 5 MA9 33 AF5 C7 DDATA1 4 TCAS TCLKO
25
30
22
/CAS
45
A2 A5 (PB2) DQ14 CK
R204
MA 3 MA 4 MB A 33 AD5 B7 DDATA1 5 TRAS
26
29
/RAS
23
44
A3 A4 MBA DQ15 CKE
C283 MA8 DDATA1 6 TCS C 1218 R1252
1 AB2 G1 1
27
28
24
43
VDD3 VSS1 UDQM DQ16 /CS NC4 33
6.3V R1284 6.3V
X6S C289 MA1 DDATA1 7 DADRS12 TADRS12 C 1208 X6S TADRS1 2
AA2 G2 47 1
25
42
1000p LDQM DQ17 NC3 A12
50V B+ R1285 6.3V
C286 B UDQM AB4 G3 DDATA1 8 DBA0 47 TBA0 TBA0 X6S TADRS1 1
26
41
10 MCLKOUT DQ18 BA0 A11
10V R1286
LDQM DDATA1 9 DBA1 TBA1 TBA1 TADRS9
D C AC4 F1 47
27
40
MCKE DQ19 BA1 A9
MCKE
AF2 H3 DDATA2 0 TADRS10 TADRS8
28
39
WE Z WEB DQ20 A10/AP A8
AF4 H2 DDATA2 1 TADRS0 TADRS7
R211
29
38
RASB DQ21 A0 A7
HADRS13
0 R1287
MCLK AE2 H1 DDATA2 2 47 TADRS1 TADRS6
30
37
CASB DQ22 DW E TW E A1 A6
R117
68 J3 DDATA2 3 TADRS2 TADRS5
31
36
DQ23 DCS0B TCS A2 A5
R1071
10k P20 D9 DDATA2 4 TADRS3 TADRS4
32
35
RADD00/GPIO01 DQ24 DRAS TRAS A3 A4
HADRS1 Y20 E9 DDATA2 5 C 1217
33
34
RADD01 DQ25 DCAS TCAS 1 VDD3 VSS1
6.3V
HADRS2 Y24 D8 DDATA2 6 X6S
RADD02 DQ26
IC1102 HADRS3 AA22
RADD03 DQ27
E8 DDATA2 7
R1288 R1277
0
C 1209
1000p
C 1211
0.1
16V
FLASH ROM HADRS4 W23 DDATA2 8 DCLK O 22 TCLKO 50V
R1035 D7 B F
R1034 RADD04 DQ28
B+ 10k 10k
HADRS5 DDATA2 9 C 1231
V23 E7 R1279 C 1236
IC1102 DQ29 10
HADRS5
HADRS5 S29GL064A90TFIR90H C 1101
1000p
HADRS6 Y23
RADD05
RADD06 DQ30
D6 DDATA3 0 DCLKNO
R1289
22
390 TCLKNO
10V
C IC1221 100
4V
50V R1278 DDR SDRAM C 1223
HADRS6 HADRS16 B HADRS17 HADRS7 V21 E6 DDATA3 1 C 1221
0 1
48
A15 DQ31 1
1
66
46
VSS2 0.1
3
1
A T/XDT A13 RADD09 DCS1B VDD1 VSS3
16V
VREF_D HADRS13 HDATA1 5 HADRS10 P22 A2 DRAS R1261 R1265 F R1273 R1268
65
45
4
22 22 0
2
VREF_D A12 DQ15/A-1 RADD10 DRASB 0 DQ0 DQ15
HADRS12 HDATA7 HADRS11 DCAS DDATA8 C 1219 DDATA3 1
U22 B2 1
64
44
5
3
A11 DQ7 RADD11 DCASB 6.3V VDDQ1 VSSQ5
HADRS11 HDATA1 4 HADRS12 P23 C2 DW E DDATA9 X6S DDATA3 0
63
43
6
DQ14
4
A10 DQ14 RADD12 DWEB DQ1
HADRS10 HDATA6 HADRS13 U21 F3 DDM 0 DDATA1 0 DDATA2 9
62
42
7
DQ13
5
A9 DQ6 RADD13 DDQM0 DQ2
C 1224
HADRS9 HDATA1 3 HADRS14 U20 A5 DDM 1 DDATA1 1 0.01 DDATA2 8
61
41
8
VDDQ5
6
A8 DQ13 RADD14 DDQM1 VSSQ1 16V
R1107 B
HADRS20 0 HDATA5 HADRS15 AB24 J1 DDM 2
60
40
9
DQ12
7
A19 DQ5 RADD15 DDQM2 DQ3
HADRS21 HDATA1 2 HADRS16 R24 B9 DDM 3 R1262 R1266 R1274 R1269
DQ11
59
39
10
0 0
8
A20 DQ12 RADD16 DDQM3 22 DQ4 22
HWS0 HDATA4 HADRS17 M21 DDQS 0 DDATA1 2 C 1225 DDATA2 7
F2 0.01
58
38
11
9
WE DQ4 RADD17 DDQS0 16V VDDQ2 VSSQ4
C 1113 HADRS18 DDQS 1 DDATA1 3 B DDATA2 6
1 N21 C6
57
37
12
10
8 XRESET
R1110
RESET VCC 6.3V RADD18 DDQS1 DQ5 DQ10
HADRS22 0 X6S HDATA1 1 HADRS19 T23 J2 DDQS 2 DDATA1 4 DDATA2 5
56
A21
36
13
11
TO DQ11 RADD19 DDQS2 DQ6 DQ9
(2/7,3/7,5/7,7/7) HDATA3 HADRS20 DDQS 3 DDATA1 5 C 1229 DDATA2 4
R1191 R1164 R1163 R22 C9
F 1000p
55
35
14
12
4.7k 4.7k 4.7k WP/ACC DQ3 RADD20 DDQS3 VSSQ2 VDDQ4 50V
R1103 HDATA1 0 HADRS21 W20 DBA0 B
B3
0
IC200
54
34
15
13
RY/BY DQ10 RADD21 DBA0 DQ7 DQ8
HADRS19 B+ HDATA2 HADRS22 P24 A3 DBA1
53
33
16
14
A18 DQ2 RADD22 DBA1 EEP ROM NC1 NC6
HADRS18 HDATA9 (NOT USE) M20 DCKE SO C 1226
D5 1000p
52
32
17
15
A17 DQ9 HADRS23 RADD23/GPIO02 DCKE R1263 R1267 50V VDDQ3 VSSQ3 R1275 R1270
HADRS8 HDATA1 HSTTOM DCLKO SCLK DDQS1 0 22 B 22 0 DDQS3
N19 C1
51
31
18
16
A7 DQ1 R1199 RADD24/GPIO03 DCLK LDQS UDQS
HADRS7 HDATA8 HSMTOT 10k P19 B1 DCLKNO C 1057 C 1214
50
30
19
17
A6 DQ8 RADD25/GPIO04 DCLKB 0.1 IC200 NC2 NC5 0.1
16V C201 16V
HADRS6 HDATA0 HDATA0 W21 SCLK SST25VF016B-50-4C-S2AF-T 0.1 C 1227
F6 F 1 F
49
29
20
18
A5 DQ0 RDATA00 DVREF 10V VDD2 VREF
R1132 R1028 B 6.3V
HADRS5 47 HDOE 10k HDATA1 Y21 A9 SI CSO Z X6S
48
28
21
19
VDD
1
A4 OE RDATA01 DIHM CE R1264 R1260 NC VSS2 R1276 R1271
8
R1021 R1027 R1037 R1036 33 22 22 33
10k HADRS4 10k HDATA2 AA21 C10 C 1056 SI C202 DDM 1 DDM 3
10 100 43
47
27
22
20
VSS1 1 HOLD 1
2
SPDIFSEL A3 RDATA02 DILM SO LDM UDM
7
0.5% 0.5% 6.3V R201 6.3V
HADRS3 HCS0 HDATA3 U23 X6 S 10k X6S TW E TCLKNO
TO
46
26
23
21
SCK /WE
3
A2 CE RDATA03 WP /CK
6
(2/7,2/7)
HADRS2 HADRS1 HDATA4 V22 AD9 SCLK TCAS TCLKO
45
25
24
22
SFSCK SI
4
A1 A0 RDATA04 VSS /CAS CK
5
HDATA5 T24 AD10 SI TRAS
R1153 R1161 R1195
44
23
RDATA05 SFSI /RAS CKE
B+ 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k R107
HDATA6 SO B+ TCS R1272
U24 AD8 47k 33 R1219
43
24
V+3D RDATA06 SFSO /CS NC4 0
G (RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950)
R1033
10k
R1032
10k HDATA7 N23 AD11 CSOZ TADRS1 2
42
A12
25
3 RDATA07 SFCS0B NC3
HDATA8 R23 TBA0 TADRS1 1
41
26
TO (1/7) GND D RDATA08 BA0 A11
C 1104 C 1105
B+ 1 0.1 HDATA9 M22 F18 R219 TBA1 TADRS9
40
R220
27
V +2R5 6.3V 16V RDATA09 IR_OUT/GPIO53 4.7k CN201 10P BA1 A9
X6S F 4.7k
HDATA1 0 T22 AA19 MD 0 T P201 TADRS10 TADRS8
39
28
RDATA10 FB/TTX/RTS1B/GPIO40 1 PW A10/AP A8
R1182 R1016
HDATA1 1 T21 V20 JL999 10k 10k
MD 1 T P202 TADRS0 TADRS7
38
29
RDATA11 GCSB0 2 A9(ATA) A0 A7
HDATA1 2 P21 T20 JL997 MD 2 T P203 TADRS1 TADRS6
37
30
RDATA12 GCSB1 3 D5(AG) A1 A6
HDATA1 3 N22 R19 SCL_G P MD 5 T P204 TADRS2 TADRS5
36
31
RDATA13 GCSB2/GPIO5 4 D1(SL) A2 A5
HSTTOM HDATA1 4 N20 T19 T P205 TADRS3 TADRS4
R1111
35
32
HSTTOM RDATA14 GCSB3/GPIO6 5 D0(MA) A3 A4
14 100k
HSMTOT HDATA1 5 SDA_GP HADRS13 T P206 C 1220 DCKE
R21 R20 (FOR CHECK) 1
34
33
HSMTOT RDATA15 GRDYB/GPIO7 6 GN D VDD3 VSS1
TO (3/7) R1018 6.3V
HDOE 0 W22 W24 JL998 T P210 X6S R1205
FOEB/GOEB FCSB1 7 XRESET 10k
R1019 T P207
HWS0 0 AA24 V24 REM O C 1228 TP614
FWEB/GWED FCSB0 8 TX_FE 1000p
R1040 REMI T P208 50V C 1212 C1230 C1291
100 9 RX_FE B 0.1 0.1 0.1
0.5% 16V 16V 16V
T P209 B+ F F
H R221
47k
R222
47k R223 10 V+3D
F
R1039 22 SCL_GP
43 SCL_GP
R1017 0.5% 15
A T/XDT
HCS0 0 SDA_GP
SDA_GP
TO (6/7)
REM I
REM I
B+ REM O
REM O 16
VREF_D
SI
SI TO (7/7)
SCLK
SCLK
MEMORY BLOCK
4-29 4-30 RD-065 (4/7)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
RD-065 BOARD(5/7)
SATA/IDE IF
-REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- IC1001 (3/5)
A AV ENC/DEC
IC1001
CN3801 40P
MC10050F1-105-LU1-A (AS,BS)
TP3801 R3808 MC10050F1-505-LU1-A(CS,DS)
100 AT0RESET
HRESET 40
GND 39
TP3802 AT0DATA7
HDB7 38 R3810
TP3803 33 AT0DATA8 AT1DATA0 M4 V14 AT0DATA0
HDB8 37 AT1D00 AT0D00/HDD0
TP3804 AT0DATA6 AT1DATA1 R1 U11 AT0DATA1
HDB6 36 AT1D01 AT0D01/HDD
TP3805 AT0DATA9 AT1DATA2 R4 U12 AT0DATA2
HDB9 35 AT1D02 AT0D02/HDD2
TP3806 AT0DATA5 AT1DATA3 R2 W15 AT0DATA3
HDB5 34 AT1D03 AT0D03/HDD3
R3811
TP3807 33 AT0DATA10 AT1DATA4 N5 V11 AT0DATA4
HDB10 33 AT1D04 AT0D04/HDD4
TP3808 AT0DATA4 AT1DATA5 R3 T12 AT0DATA5
B HDB4 32
TP3809 AT0DATA11 AT1DATA6
AT1D05 AT0D05/HDD5
AT0DATA6
P4 P13
HDB11 31 AT1D06 AT0D06/HDD6
TP3810 AT0DATA3 AT1DATA7 T1 R15 AT0DATA7
HDB3 30 AT1D07 AT0D07/HDD7
R3812
TP3811 33 AT0DATA12 AT1DATA8 T2 R13 AT0DATA8
HDB12 29 AT1D08 AT0D08/HDD8
TP3812 AT0DATA2 AT1DATA9 P5 V10 AT0DATA9
HDB2 28 AT1D09 AT0D09/HDD9
TP3813 AT0DATA13 AT1DATA10 T3 P15 AT0DATA10
HDB13 27 AT1D10 AT0D10/HDD10
TP3814 AT0DATA1 AT1DATA11 R5 U13 AT0DATA11
HDB1 26 AT1D11 AT0D11/HDD11
R3813
TP3815 33 AT0DATA14 AT1DATA12 U1 R14 AT0DATA12
HDB14 25 AT1D12 AT0D12/HDD12
TP3816 AT0DATA0 AT1DATA13 N4 U15 AT0DATA13
HDB0 24 AT1D13 AT0D13/HDD13
TP3817 AT0DATA15 AT1DATA14 U2 W13 AT0DATA14
HDB15 23 AT1D14 AT0D14/HDD14
AT1DATA15 W1 T14 AT0DATA15
GND 22 AT1D15 AT0D15/HDD15
AT1ADR0 U3 W14 AT0ADR0
GND 21 AT1DA0 AT0DA0/HDA0
DVD TP3818 R3814
22 AT0DMARQ AT1ADR1 W2 U10 AT0ADR1
UNIT DMARQ 20 AT1DA1 AT0DA1/HDA1
C GND 19
AT1ADR2 T5
AT1DA2 AT0DA2/HDA2
U14 AT0ADR2
TP3819 R3816
82 AT0DIOW AT1DIOW U5 P14 AT0DIOW
XDIOW 18 AT1DIOWB AT0DIOWB/DIOW
A T1DIOR V1 R12 AT0DIOR
GND 17 AT1DIORB AT0DIORB/DIORB
TP3820 R3817
82 AT0DIOR A T1INTRQ M5 V12 AT0INTRQ
XDIOR 16 AT1INTRQ AT0INTRQ/HINTRQ
AT1DMACK V2 V15 AT0DMACK
R3862 AT0DMACKB/HDMACKB
GND 15 0 AT1DMACKB
TP3821 R3818
22 AT0IORDY AT1DMARQ V5 T15 AT0DMARQ
IORDY 14 AT1DMARQ AT0DMARQ/HDMARQ
TP3822 AT1CS0 T4 W12 AT0CS0
HCSEL 13 AT1CS0B AT0CS0B/HCS0B
TP3823 R3820
82 AT0DMACK AT1CS1 V3 W11 AT0CS1
XDMACK 12 AT1CS1B AT0CS1B/HCS1B
AT1IORDY U4 T13 AT0IORDY
GND 11
TP3824 R3821
22 AT0INTRQ AT1RESET V4
AT1IORDY AT0IORDY/IORDY
V13 AT0RESET
SIGNAL PATH
INTRQ 10 AT1RESETB AT0RESETB/HRSTB
TP3825 TP1005
XIOCS16 9 HIOCS16B
AD7 VIDEO SIGNAL
TP3826 R3823
82 AT0ADR1 RXD2_BRIDGE AH23 AC6 TP1003 AUDI O
HA1 8 RXD2B/GPIO42 PDIAGB
TP3827 TXD2_BRIDGE AD6 TP1004 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
AJ24
D XPDIAG 7
TP3828 AT0ADR0
TXD2B/GPIO43 DASPB
HA0 6
REC
R3824
TP3829 82 AT0ADR2
HA2 5
TP3830 AT0CS0
PB
XCS1FX 4
TP3831 AT0CS1
XCS3FX 3
TP3832
XDASP 2
TP3834
RXD2_BRIDGE
TXD2_BRIDGE
AT1CS0
AT1CS1
PDIAG
DAS P
GND 1 TP3835
R3871
22k
(RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950) R3828
R5692
R5693
R5606
R5607
22K
82
82
0
0
CN3802 40P R3835 C5632
C5604 C5631 C5630
R5612
R5613
R5614
TP3836 33 AT1RESET C5605
10k
0.01
1k
1k
Reset# 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
16V 16V 16V 16V
16V B
B B B B
GND 2
R5619
TP3837 AT1DATA7
1k
DD7 3
R3837 B+
E DD8 4
TP3838 33 AT1DATA8
TP3839 AT1DATA6
DD6 5 B+ R5610
TP3840 AT1DATA9
R5617
1k
1k
DD9 6
TP3841 R5609 R5615
AT1DATA5 10k 1k
DD5 7
R3838 R5608 R5618
TP3842 33 AT1DATA10 10k 10k
DD10 8 C5615
TP3843 AT1DATA4 (RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950) R5672 0.1
DD4 9 0 10V
TP3844 B
AT1DATA11
DD11 10 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
TP3845 AT1DATA3
UAO
VCCO2
DGND2
VCCK2
PHYRDY
PMEN
SSCEN
MSSEL
CLKSEL1
CLKSEL0
DASPn
PDIAGn
UAI
CS0n
CS1n
FXDMA
DD3 11
R3839 C5614
TP3846 33 AT1DATA12 0.01
DD12 12 16V CN5604 7P
TP3847 R5622 C5622
AT1DATA2 AT1ADR2 82 B 0.01
DD2 13 49 DA2 TXP 32 16V 1 GND
TP3848 R5623 C5623
AT1DATA13 AT1ADR0 82 B 0.01
DD13 14 50 DA0 TXN 31 16V 2 TXP
TP3849 R5624
AT1DATA1 AT1ADR1 82 B
DD1 15 51 DA1 AGND2 30 3 TXN
R3840
TP3850 33 AT1DATA14 C5624
HDD
F DD14 16
TP3851 AT1DATA0 A T1INTRQ
R5626
52 SP AVDDL 29 0.01
16V
4 GND
UNIT
DD0 17
TP3852 AT1DATA15 AT1DMACK
22
R5627
82
53 INTRQ
IC5602 RXN 28
B
C5625
0.01
5 RXN
TP3853 0
KEYPIN 20 R3841 56 VCCK3 IC5602 AGND1 25
TP3854 82 R3829 R3830 R3831 88SA8040-TBC1C000 C5616
22k 22k 22k AT1DMARQ 0.1
DMARQ 21 57 DGND3 AVDDH 24 10V
R5629 B
A T1DIOR 82
R3842
GND 22 R3843 5.6k 58 DIORn XTALO 23 R5688
TP3855 22 R5630
AT1DIOW AT1DIOW 82 1M
DIOW# 23 59 DIOWn XTALI 22
R5631 R5661
AT1DMARQ 22 1k X5502 25MH z
GND 24 R3844 60 DMARQ ATAIOEN 21
TP3856 22 AT1DIOR AT1DATA15 R5689
MODE2 1k
1
DIOR# 25 61 DD15 20
AT1DATA0 R5657
R3857 1k C5617
GND 26 R3845 62 DD0 MODE1 19 0.01
0
TP3857 82 AT1IORDY AT1DATA14 16V
B
2
IORDY 27 63 DD14 MODE0 18
TP3858 AT1DATA1
CSEL 28 R3847 64 DD1 PORn 17
G DMACK# 29
TP3859 22 AT1DMACK
R5632
C5611
0.01
R5659
1k
C5629
0.01
R5658
1k
C5628
0.01
C562 7
0.01
C5626
0.01 C5640 C5641
RESETn
VCCK1
DD13
DD12
DD11
DD10
B B B B B
DD2
DD3
DD4
DD5
DD9
DD6
DD8
DD7
DASP# 39
TP3869 R5638 R5642 R5646
GND 40 33 33 33
R3846
H 1k R3832
22k
R3833
22k
V+3D
B+ C 3801 C3802 C 3803 C 3804 B+
1 1 1 1
4 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V
X6S X6S X6S X6S
AT1DATA13
AT1DATA12
AT1DATA11
AT1DATA10
TO (1/7) GNDD
AT1RESET
AT1DATA2
AT1DATA3
AT1DATA4
AT1DATA5
AT1DATA9
AT1DATA6
AT1DATA8
AT1DATA7
TP3870 B+
V +1R8
B+
SATA/IDE IF
RD-065 (5/7) 4-31 4-32
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
RD-065 BOARD(6/7)
HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES-
R5825
22
1
C5816 50V
PHY_D0 C5803 0.1 B+ B
E13
L 5801
R5829 1 25V
90uH
PHY_D0/VID0 CLK 56 6.3V R5843 3 Not open to public
B
D13 PHY_D1 X6S 330 C5213
1 R1006 R1005
PHY_D1/VID1 4 Not open to public 15K 15K CN5201 10P
6.3V R5201 TP5202
PHY_D2 D7 USB_DN 0
4
E12 X6S 0
PHY_D2/VID2 C5817 5 Not open to public 10 USBDM2
D12 PHY_D3 D6 0.1
3
PHY_D3/VID3 25V 6 Not open to public 9 GND
R5827 R5865
R5844 B IC5203
PHY_D4 D5 330 TC7SH08FU(T5RSOYJF) TP5203
L5201
E11 22 0
0uH
PHY_D4/VID4 7 Not open to public 8 USBDP2
TP5204
1
D11 PHY_D5 D4
1
PHY_D5/VID5 8 Not open to public VCC INB 7 GND TO FL-178
L5802
R5202
2
C5804 C5818
90uH
E10 PHY_D6 D3 1000p 0.1 (RDR-GX350) USB_DP0 0 B+ TP5201 BOARD
2
PHY_D6/VID6 50V R5845 25V 9 Not open to public INA 6 V+5USB CN102
B B R5222 TP5205
D10 PHY_D7 D2 330 USB_D_VBUS 10 THROUGH THE
3
PHY_D7/VID7 10 Not open to public OUTY GND 5 USBVF B
R5828
C IR_IN/GPIO52
F20 D1 22
11 Not open to public
R5206
47k
R5221
47k 4 GND
RU-001 HARNESS
R5216 TP5206
D0
12 Not open to public
USB_D_DN0 0
3 USBDM1
(SEE PAGE 4-21)
M2 USB_DP0 DE TP5802 R5208 TP5208
3
USB_DP0 13 Not open to public 47k VDD STANDBY C5216 2 GND
1000p
L520 2
M1 USB_DN0 HSYNC USB_CLKI 50V TP5207
L 5803
R5838 R5863
0uH
90uH
USB_DN0 R5855 33 680 14 Not open to public OUT GN D B 1 USBDP1
USB_CLKI VSYNC 10 C5805 TP5803 R5205
N1 1 68
USB_CLKI/GPIO55 6.3V 15 Not open to public
R5217
4
X5201
2
USB_H_OCI0 CTL3 C5807 X6S TP5804 USB_D_CONEECT USB_D_DP 0
M3 1 R5839 R5862 0
USB_H_OCI0/GPIO56 6.3V 470 4.7k 16 Not open to public
C560 1 C5223 R5213
N2 USB_H_PPON0 X6S 1 USB_H_OCI0 0
1000p
USB_H_PPON0/GPIO57 Q5809 6.3V 17 Not open to public 50V R5212
USB_D_DP0 R5861 UMD2N-TR X6S B USB_H_PPON0
P2 10k 0
USB_D_DP0 SWITCH 18 Not open to public
R5833 B+
1
USB_D_DN0 C5822 R5854 TP5805 C5222
P1 22 1000 p 10k 1 4 0.1
USB_D_DN0 50V 19 Not open to public 16V
L 5804
R5834
90uH
N3 USB_D_VBUS 22 B C 5806 2 5 R5824 F
USB_D_VBUS/GPIO58
P3 USB_D_CONEECT
R5831
0
1
6.3V
X6S
0.1
25V
R5832
0.1
GNDHS C5205
R5207
0
R5220
1.5k IC5204 R5214
47k
4
USB_D_CONNECT/GPIO59 1
R5837 6.3V 5V REG
0 3 6 X6S
R5803
0.1 B+
16V TP5209 C5219
C580 9
D B+
L 5805 220
4V B+ B+ C 5813
0.1
C 5812
0.1
C 5814
0.1 B+
1000p
50V
B
I EM I O 16V 16V 16V 4 5
TP5801 F F F C5209
G
VOUT
VI N
0.1
X 5101 R5203 IC5202 16V
R1173H001B
C 5117 24.576MHz 3.3k R5523N001B-TR-F F
C5218
IC5204
12p C521 2
50V C5118 2.2 1000p
PHY_XRST 50V C5210
B+ 12p 10V
ON/OFF
1
B EN VOUT 100
5
50V B
VSS
16V
NC
R5836 R5852 Q5802
GND
2
10k 10k RN2903(T5RSONY,D,F)
SWITCH
2
3 2 1 FLG VIN
4
C5217
1
15 SDA_GP 6.3V R5204
X6S 820
TO (4/7) SCL_GP
R5815
Q5804 2.7k R5814 C 5115
B+ C5133 C 5120 R5215 IC5202
L5101
4.7k 1 C5121
DTC124EUA-T106 1 1
0uH
SCL_VDEC 6.3V 100 47k
6.3V 6.3V 4V
SWITCH X6S X6S X6S USB 5V SW
11 SDA_VDEC R5813
2.7k R5812 C5116
4.7k 1 B+
TO (2/7) HDMI/XDVI
R5111
6.3V R5110
E
1k
X6S 10k
1080P
R5115
R5116
R5113
R5114
10k
10k
10k
10k
R5101 R5102
100k 100k R5117
100k
C5114
0.1 C 5119
270p
D6 17
D7 18
SUS/RES 19
DVDD 20
DGND 21
X0 22
X1 23
AGND 24
AVDD 25
PC0 26
PC1 27
PC2 28
IC(AL) 29
CMC 30
AVDD 31
CPS 32
16V
F 50V
S
R5105
68
PHY_D7
Q5808 R5131
2SK2034-TE85L 5.1k
PHY_D6 0.5%
SWITCH
33
IC5802 DGND AGND
16
TC7MB3257FK(EL) PHY_D5 R5118
34
D5 RI1 9.1k R5120 R5119
15
PHY_D4 0.5% 56 56
0.5% 0.5%
16
35
B+
1
14
R5135 TP5103
C5104 0
R5817 R5818 R5106
15
0.1
36
2
13
4.7k 4.7k 68 16V R5134
R5859 PHY_D3 F
IC5103 0 TP5104
14
10k
37
3
12
R5132
DDC_SW1 PHY_D2 0 BOARD
13
DV PHY